Ricoh 2018D manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814

Ir para a página of

Bom manual de uso

As regras impõem ao revendedor a obrigação de fornecer ao comprador o manual com o produto Ricoh 2018D. A falta de manual ou informações incorretas fornecidas ao consumidor são a base de uma queixa por não conformidade do produto com o contrato. De acordo com a lei, pode anexar o manual em uma outra forma de que em papel, o que é frequentemente utilizado, anexando uma forma gráfica ou manual electrónicoRicoh 2018D vídeos instrutivos para os usuários. A condição é uma forma legível e compreensível.

O que é a instrução?

A palavra vem do latim "Instructio" ou instruir. Portanto, no manual Ricoh 2018D você pode encontrar uma descrição das fases do processo. O objetivo do manual é instruir, facilitar o arranque, a utilização do equipamento ou a execução de determinadas tarefas. O manual é uma coleção de informações sobre o objeto / serviço, um guia.

Infelizmente, pequenos usuários tomam o tempo para ler o manual Ricoh 2018D, e um bom manual não só permite conhecer uma série de funcionalidades adicionais do dispositivo, mas evita a formação da maioria das falhas.

Então, o que deve conter o manual perfeito?

Primeiro, o manual Ricoh 2018D deve conte:
- dados técnicos do dispositivo Ricoh 2018D
- nome do fabricante e ano de fabricação do dispositivo Ricoh 2018D
- instruções de utilização, regulação e manutenção do dispositivo Ricoh 2018D
- sinais de segurança e certificados que comprovam a conformidade com as normas pertinentes

Por que você não ler manuais?

Normalmente, isso é devido à falta de tempo e à certeza quanto à funcionalidade específica do dispositivo adquirido. Infelizmente, a mesma ligação e o arranque Ricoh 2018D não são suficientes. O manual contém uma série de orientações sobre funcionalidades específicas, a segurança, os métodos de manutenção (mesmo sobre produtos que devem ser usados), possíveis defeitos Ricoh 2018D e formas de resolver problemas comuns durante o uso. No final, no manual podemos encontrar as coordenadas do serviço Ricoh na ausência da eficácia das soluções propostas. Atualmente, muito apreciados são manuais na forma de animações interessantes e vídeos de instrução que de uma forma melhor do que o o folheto falam ao usuário. Este tipo de manual é a chance que o usuário percorrer todo o vídeo instrutivo, sem ignorar especificações e descrições técnicas complicadas Ricoh 2018D, como para a versão papel.

Por que ler manuais?

Primeiro de tudo, contem a resposta sobre a construção, as possibilidades do dispositivo Ricoh 2018D, uso dos acessórios individuais e uma gama de informações para desfrutar plenamente todos os recursos e facilidades.

Após a compra bem sucedida de um equipamento / dispositivo, é bom ter um momento para se familiarizar com cada parte do manual Ricoh 2018D. Atualmente, são cuidadosamente preparados e traduzidos para sejam não só compreensíveis para os usuários, mas para cumprir a sua função básica de informação

Índice do manual

  • Página 1

    Operating I nstructions General Settings Guide For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it. Getti ng S tarted Combin ed Functi on Operat ions User T ools (Sy stem Sett ings ) Troubl eshoo ting Other F unction s Enteri ng Text Security Specif icat ions[...]

  • Página 2

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. Important Conte[...]

  • Página 3

    i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the re levant parts o f the manual . Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are pr ovided: • CD-ROM 1 “O[...]

  • Página 4

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes the installation of, an d the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail. This g[...]

  • Página 5

    iii Machine Types This machine comes in three models which vary by copy speed and available op- tions. ❍ : Can be used with this type — : Cannot be used with this type Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Copy speed 15 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K ) 18 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K ) 18 copies/minute (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 &[...]

  • Página 6

    iv What You Can Do with This Machine The following introd uces the functions of th is machine, and th e relevant manu- als containing detailed information about them. Products marked with * are op tional . For deta ils about opt ional pro ducts, see p.13 “ Opt io ns ” , o r contact y our local dea ler. Copier, Fa csimile, Printer, and Scanner F[...]

  • Página 7

    v Fax Transmissi on and Reception throu gh the Internet • You can send fax d ocument s through e-mail by specifyin g the recipient's e-m ail address (Trans- mitting Intern et Fax). You can receiv e sent docum ents via Internet Fax, or fr om comput- ers (Receiving In ternet Fax). See Facsim ile Ref ere nce<Basi c Fea- tures> . Using the[...]

  • Página 8

    vi Monitori ng the Machine Usi ng a Computer You can mo nitor m achine s tatus an d change set tings using a co mputer. • Usi ng Sm art Dev ic eM on ito r f or Admin, Sm artDeviceMoni tor for Client, or a Web browser, you can use a com puter to view the ma- chine's status, such as to check on pape r quanti ties , or misfe eds, etc. See Net w[...]

  • Página 9

    vii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ......... ...... ....... .. i Machine Types ....... ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ..... i ii What You Can Do with This Machine ........... ........ ....... ......[...]

  • Página 10

    viii Address Book......... ....... .......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ........ ....... ......... ......... ........ .... 43 Regist ering D esti nation Inform ation . ...... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... ...... ...... .......... ...... .... 4 4 Regist ering S end er Info rmat ion .......... ...... ...... ...... .......... ......[...]

  • Página 11

    ix 7. Secur ity Security ... ....... ....... ......... .......... ....... ....... ....... .......... ......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ...... 97 Primary Secu rity Fu ncti ons . ......... ....... ...... ...... ......... ....... ...... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... . 97 Extend ed Secu rity Fun ction ... .......... ...... ...... ..[...]

  • Página 12

    x[...]

  • Página 13

    1 Copyrights and Trademarks Trademarks Microsoft ® , W indows ® and Windows NT ® are registered trademarks of Micro- soft Corporation in the United States and/or other co untries. PostScript ® and Acrobat ® are a r egi st ered tr ade mar k of A dob e Sy st ems Inc orp o- rated. Bluetoot h ™ is a trade mark o f the Blueto oth SIG, Inc. (Spe c[...]

  • Página 14

    2 Inform ation about Install ed Software expat • The software inc luding controller, etc . (hereinaf ter “ soft wa re ” ) installed on this product uses the expat Version 1.95.2 (herei nafter “ expa t ” ) un der t he c on- ditio ns men tione d below. • The produc t manufacturer provid es warranty and support to the software of the produ[...]

  • Página 15

    3 Redistribution and use in sourc e and binary forms, with or without modifica- tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: A Redistribution s of source c ode mus t retain the abov e copyright n otice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. B Redistributions in bin ary form must reproduce the above copyright n[...]

  • Página 16

    4 • This prod uct inc ludes s oftware develo ped by Jonat han Ston e and Ja son R. Thorpe for the Net BSD Project. • This product includes software deve loped by the University of California, Lawrence Ber keley Laboratory and its contributor s. • This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas . • This product incl udes software[...]

  • Página 17

    5 e) The source code of th e Sablotro n softwar e is available at: htt p://www.g inger- all.com. f) MPL 1.1 is available at: http: //www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html. JPEG LIBRARY • The software installe d on this product is bas ed in part on the work of the In- dependent JPEG Group. SASL CMU libsasl Tim Martin Rob Earhart Rob Siemborski Copyrigh[...]

  • Página 18

    6 MD4 Copyright (C) 1990-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved. License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “ RSA Data Securi ty, Inc. MD4 Message-D igest Algori thm ” in all material mention ing or refere ncing th is software o r this func tion . License is also granted to make and us e deriv[...]

  • Página 19

    7 How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symb ol indicates a potenti ally hazar dous situation tha t might resu lt in death or serious injury when you misuse the machi ne without following the in- structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions , all of which are de- scrib[...]

  • Página 20

    8 ENERGY STAR Program • Low Power mo de This product automatically lowers its power consumption 1 minute after fin- ishing the last copy or print job. Fax reception and printing is still possible in Low Power mode, b ut to make copies, you have to press the oper ation switch first. For de tail s about how to chang e the inter val betw een la st j[...]

  • Página 21

    9 • Duplex Priority (Type 3 only) To cons erve paper, t he Duple x functi on (1- Sided → 2-Sided) ca n be se lected prefer enti ally whe n you tur n on the o peratio n swit ch or the ma in power switch, press the { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key, or the machine resets its elf automatically. To change Duplex Priority mode, see Copy Reference . Sp[...]

  • Página 22

    10[...]

  • Página 23

    11 1. Getting Started Guide to Components 1. Expo sure glass cov er ( option al) , ADF (optiona l), or ARDF (optional). See p.13 “ Ext ernal Op tions ” (The illustration shows the ARDF.) 2. Exposu re glass Plac e ori gin als here f ace down . 3. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray) (opt ion- al) The indic ator l ights when paper i s deli v- ered to int[...]

  • Página 24

    Getting Started 12 1 6. Main power switch If the mac hine do es no t operate af ter turnin g on the op erat ion s wit ch, ch eck the ma in powe r switc h is turned on. If it is off, turn i t on. 7. Main power in dicator Lights when the mai n power swit ch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is tu rned off. 8. On indicator Lights when the op [...]

  • Página 25

    Options 13 1 Options External Options 1. Exposure glas s cover Lower t his c over ove r origi nals. 2. ADF Place stacks o f original s here. They will feed in automat ically. 3. ARDF Place stacks o f original s here. T h e y w i l l f e e d i n a u t o m a t i c a l l y . T h i s d o c - ument feeder can be used for two -sided orig inals. 4. Intern[...]

  • Página 26

    Getting Started 14 1 Internal Options A Fax un it Allows you to use the facsi mile function. B Printer/Sc anner unit Allows you to use the pr inter and s canner functi ons. C Parallel port IEEE 1284 interf ace board Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 c able. D IEEE 1394 interfac e board Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1394 c able. E IEEE 802.11[...]

  • Página 27

    Control Panel 15 1 Control Panel This illustration shows the control panel of the machine with options fully in- stalled. 1. Fax f unct ion keys Reference Facsimile Re ference <Basic Fea tures> and Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> 2. { { { { Facsimile } } } } key Pre ss to ac tivat e the facsim ile fu ncti on. 3. Scanne r/Fax fun[...]

  • Página 28

    Getting Started 16 1 14. { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key. • Clear: Clears an e ntered n umeric va lue. • Stop: Stops a job in progress, s uch as scan- ning, faxing, or printi ng. 15. Main power indicator and On indicator The main power indicato r ligh ts when the main po wer switch is turned on. The On indicator lights when the operation switch[...]

  • Página 29

    Control Panel 17 1 Display The d isp la y pane l show s ma chin e st atus , e rror m ess ag es, and func tio n me nus. Important ❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display. The copy disp lay is set as the default screen when the mach ine is turned on. When you select or specify an item on the display, it is highli[...]

  • Página 30

    Getting Started 18 1 Common key operations The following keys are c ommon to all scr eens: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key list [ Cancel ] Deletes a sele cted function or entered values, and then the prev ious display returns. [ Exit ] The previous dis play returns. [ Stop ] Stops a job in progr ess. [ Yes ] Acknowledges a selected function or an entered value[...]

  • Página 31

    19 2. Combined Function Operations Changing Modes Note ❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations: • When scanning a fax message for transmission • During immediate transmission • When accessing User Tools • During On hook d ialing for fax transmissi on • While scanning an original ❒ The copying screen is displayed a[...]

  • Página 32

    Combined Function Operations 20 2 - - - - System Reset The machine retu rns autom aticall y to it s init ial condi tion w hen t he job is fi n- ished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This function is called “ System Reset ” . Note ❒ You can change th e System Reset time. S ee p.32 “ System A uto R eset T imer ” .[...]

  • Página 33

    Multi-Access 21 2 Multi-Access You can carry ou t another job using a different func tion while t he current job is being performed. Perf orming multiple functions simulta neously li ke this is called “ Multi-accessi ng ” . This allows you to handle jobs efficiently, regardles s of how the machine is being used. For example: • You can make co[...]

  • Página 34

    Combined Function Operations 22 2 - - - - Function compatibility The chart shows function compatibility whe n print priority is set to “ Inte rle ave ” . See p.28 “ Print Priority ” . b … means th at these function s can be used tog ether. $ … means th at you can interrupt th e current job with Function keys to proceed to a subseque nt [...]

  • Página 35

    23 3. User Tools (System Settings) User Tools Menu ( System Settings ) Reference For details about Interface Settings and File Tra nsfer, see Networ k Guide . For details about parallel interface , see Printer Re ference 2 . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ General Feat ures (Se e p.28 “General Fe atures ”.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Tray Paper Settings (See p.30 “Tray[...]

  • Página 36

    User Tools (System Settings) 24 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Timer Settings (See p.32 “ Timer Set tings ” .) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Interfac e Settin gs • For details about network settin gs, see Network Gui de . • For details about parallel interface, see Print er R eferenc e 2 . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ File Transf er See Net work Guide . Pap er T ype: T ray 2 No D[...]

  • Página 37

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 25 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator T ools (Se e p.34 “ Key Operat or Tools ” .) Defau lt (MFP ) Default (Copier only) User Code Management Copier Off Off Facsimile Off Scanner Off Pri nter Auto P rog ra m Key Counter Management All Off Off Key Oper ator Code Off Extended S ecurity Off Display/Print Counter — C[...]

  • Página 38

    User Tools (System Settings) 26 3 Accessing User Tools (System Settings) This sec tion is for key opera tors in charge o f this mach ine. User Tools allow you to change or set default s. Note ❒ Operations fo r system settin gs dif- fer from nor mal operations. Al- ways quit User Tools when you have finished. Se e p.27 “ Quitting User Tools ” [...]

  • Página 39

    Accessing User Tools (System Settings) 27 3 Quitting User Tools A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. O n Hook Dial On Hook Dial P ause/ Redial _ AAH011S[...]

  • Página 40

    User Tools (System Settings) 28 3 Settings You Can Change with User Tools Reference To access User Tools, see p.26 “ Accessing User Tools (S ystem Settings) ” . General F eatures ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Panel Tone The beeper (ke y tone) sounds when a key is pressed. Note ❒ Def au lt : On ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy Count Display The copy c ounter c an be se[...]

  • Página 41

    Settings You Can Change with User Tools 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Output: Copier (copier) You can specif y a tray to which do cuments are delivered . Note ❒ Def au lt : Intern al tray 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Output: Facsim ile (facsi mile) You can specif y a tray to which do cuments are delivered . Note ❒ Def au lt : Intern al tray 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Outpu[...]

  • Página 42

    User Tools (System Settings) 30 3 Tray Paper Sett ings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Tray Paper Size: Tray 1 – 4 Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper tray. • Type 1 • The paper size s you can set for Tray 1 are as follows: A3 L , B4JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) L , A4 KL , B5JIS KL , A5 K , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14&quo[...]

  • Página 43

    Settings You Can Change with User Tools 31 3 Reference p.88 “ Changing the Paper Size ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Type:Bypa ss tray Set the displ ay so you can see wh at type of paper is loaded in the bypas s tray. • The paper types you can se t for the bypas s tray are as follows: • recycl ed paper, s pecial pa per, colo ur paper, letterhead ,[...]

  • Página 44

    User Tools (System Settings) 32 3 Timer Setti ngs ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Of f Timer After a specified p eriod has passed , following job com pletion, the m achine automatically tu rns off, in orde r to conserve energy . This function is called “ Auto Off ” . The machine status after the Auto Off operation is referred to as “ Off mod e ” , or [...]

  • Página 45

    Settings You Can Change with User Tools 33 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copier Auto Rese t Timer Specify the time to elapse be fore copier modes reset. Note ❒ If [ Off ] is se lected, the mach ine does not au tomatically sw itch to th e user code entry screen. ❒ Def au lt : On , 60 sec. ❒ The time can be set f rom 10 to 999 seconds, using the numb er ke[...]

  • Página 46

    User Tools (System Settings) 34 3 Key Operator To ols The key operator must set the following items. For settings or mo re information, conta ct th e ke y ope rato r. It is reco mmended that the k ey operator program a key op erator code w hen per- forming the s ettings. See p.34 “ Key Oper ator Co de ” . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ User Co de Manag ement [...]

  • Página 47

    Settings You Can Change with User Tools 35 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Extended Security Specify whether or not to use the securi ty function. Note ❒ Def au lt : Off ❒ You have to set a 6-digit key operator code to enable Extended Security. See p.34 “ Key O perato r Code ” . Reference For details about security, see p.97 “ Security ” . ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 48

    User Tools (System Settings) 36 3 D Select [ Display/Print Counter ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Pres s [ Pr int ] . F Press the { { { { Start } } } } key. G Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Counter per User Code Allows you to view and prin t th[...]

  • Página 49

    Settings You Can Change with User Tools 37 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Address Book Management You can add, change, or delete user information in the Address Book, and f ac- simile/scanner functions des tinations. For detail s about thes e opera tions, s ee p.45 “ User Code (MFP) ” , p.55 “ Fax Destination ” , and p.64 “ E-mail Destination ” . ?[...]

  • Página 50

    User Tools (System Settings) 38 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Address Book : Print List You can pri nt the de stinatio n list reg istere d in the Ad dress Bo ok. • Destination List Prints the destination lis t registered in the Address Book. • Group Desti nation List Prints the group destina tion list registered i n the Address Book. • Quick Dial Label T[...]

  • Página 51

    User Code (For machine with copier function only) 39 3 User Code (For machine with copier function only) Register user codes to restri ct copier functions to certain user s, and chec k on their use of copier functions : Registering a New User Code A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using {[...]

  • Página 52

    User Tools (System Settings) 40 3 Changing a User Cod e Note ❒ Even if you change a us er code, the counter value wil l not be cleared. A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Ke[...]

  • Página 53

    User Code (For machine with copier function only) 41 3 F F F F Select [ Per User Code ] or [ All User Codes ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. When selecting [ All User Codes ] , a confirmation message appear s. Press [ Yes ] , and then procee d to step I . G G G G Enter the register[...]

  • Página 54

    User Tools (System Settings) 42 3 Printi ng th e Coun ter fo r Each User Code You can print out the counter for each user cod e. A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Key Oper at[...]

  • Página 55

    Address Book 43 3 Address Bo ok Registering user information, su ch as fax numbers and e- mail addresses , in the Address Book allows you to man- age them together. Important ❒ Addres s Book data i s stor ed in memory. It can be lost if there is some kind o f me mory fail ure. The manufacturer shall not be respon- sible for any damage re sulting [...]

  • Página 56

    User Tools (System Settings) 44 3 Register ing Desti nation Infor matio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Registering the destina tion name • User Na me Regis ter the d esti natio n name. This is the basic information re- quired f or managing d estina- tions . Reference p.45 “ User Code (MFP) ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using the fax func tion • Fax Settings Re[...]

  • Página 57

    User Code (MFP) 45 3 User Code (MFP) Register use r codes to restrict the fol- lowing functi ons to c ertain user s, and check their use of ea ch func tion: • Copier • Facsimile • Scan ner • Printer Note ❒ The number of copies scanned in using the scanner funct ion is counted for eac h user code . This al- lows you to check each user&apos[...]

  • Página 58

    User Tools (System Settings) 46 3 E E E E Select [ Program/Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Enter the registration number you want to pro gram using the num ber ke ys or t he Quic k Dial keys, and the n press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Enter the user (destin[...]

  • Página 59

    User Code (MFP) 47 3 F F F F Enter the registration number of the destinati on you want to change using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered user code by na me A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Sear ch by Name ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and [...]

  • Página 60

    User Tools (System Settings) 48 3 C Enter the registration number of the destin ation you want to change using th e number keys, and then p ress th e { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered user code by user c ode A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by User Code ] us - in[...]

  • Página 61

    User Code (MFP) 49 3 C Enter the e-mail address of the destination you want to change using the number keys and the Quick Dial key s, and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Reference For detai ls about en tering text, see p.95 “ Entering Text ” . D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to change using { { { {U[...]

  • Página 62

    User Tools (System Settings) 50 3 F F F F Enter the registration number you want to delete using t he number keys or the Qui ck Dial keys, an d then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered user code by na me A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Sear ch by Name ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t he[...]

  • Página 63

    User Code (MFP) 51 3 C Enter the user code of the desti- nation you w ant delete us ing the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. D Press t he { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. E Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered user code by fax number A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select[...]

  • Página 64

    User Tools (System Settings) 52 3 E Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {U U U U} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Press [ User Code ] . I I I I Press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J[...]

  • Página 65

    User Code (MFP) 53 3 Printi ng th e Coun ter fo r Each User Code You can pri nt ou t the c ounter m ade under each user code using [ Print Counter ] , [ Transmi ssion Counter ] , or [ Scanner Counter ] . A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } [...]

  • Página 66

    User Tools (System Settings) 54 3 Clearing the Coun ter A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Key Oper ator Tools ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the[...]

  • Página 67

    Fax Destination 55 3 Fax Destination Register fax destinations, so you do not need to enter them each time, and can send do cuments s canned in using the fax function. • It is easy to se lect the f ax de stin a- tion if you register a “ Us er ( Des ti- nation) Na me ” for the fax destinat ion. • You can regist er fax destinatio ns as a grou[...]

  • Página 68

    User Tools (System Settings) 56 3 E E E E Select [ Program/Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Enter the registration number you want to pro gram using the num ber ke ys or t he Quic k Dial keys, and the n press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Enter the user (destin[...]

  • Página 69

    Fax Destination 57 3 To set label in sertion When Label Insertion is set to On, the receiver's name is printed on the fax message when it is recei ved at the other end. A Select [ On ] or [ Off ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Enter the fax number using the number keys[...]

  • Página 70

    User Tools (System Settings) 58 3 B Select [ Sear ch by Name ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter the characters of the des- tination you want to change us- ing the number keys and the Quick Dial key s, and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Reference For detai ls about [...]

  • Página 71

    Fax Destination 59 3 Searching to select a registered fax des tina tion by use r co de A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by User Code ] us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T } } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter the user code of the desti- nation you want to change us- ing the number keys, and the n press th[...]

  • Página 72

    User Tools (System Settings) 60 3 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to change, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Press [ Dest . ] . I I I I Select [ Fax Se ttings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } [...]

  • Página 73

    Fax Destination 61 3 C Enter the characters of the des- tination you want to delete us- ing the number keys and the Quick Dial key s, and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Reference For detai ls about en tering text, see p.95 “ Entering Text ” . D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U[...]

  • Página 74

    User Tools (System Settings) 62 3 C Enter the user code of the desti- nation you w ant delete us ing the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. E Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered fax destin ation by fa x number A Press [ [...]

  • Página 75

    Fax Destination 63 3 E Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Press [ Dest . ] . I I I I Select [ Fax Se ttings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { O[...]

  • Página 76

    User Tools (System Settings) 64 3 E-mail Destination Regist er e-m ail desti nations , so you do not need to enter e-mail addr esses every time, and can send scan files by e-mail, or send fax d ocuments by In- ternet Fax. • It is easy to s elect the e-mail de sti- nation if yo u register “ User (Desti- nati on) N ame ” for th e e- mail destin[...]

  • Página 77

    E-mail Destination 65 3 G G G G Enter the user (destination) name using the nu mber keys and the Quick Dial keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You ca n use the user name wh en sele cting a n addr ess to send to. ❒ You can register the user code after the us er name. For d etails, see p.45 “ User Code (MFP) ” . Reference[...]

  • Página 78

    User Tools (System Settings) 66 3 A Select [ On ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter the sender's password using the number keys, an d then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You c an en ter up to eight digits. K K K K Press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. L L L L[...]

  • Página 79

    E-mail Destination 67 3 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to change using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered e-mail destinat ion from Destination L ist A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Display D esti nati on Lis t ] using {[...]

  • Página 80

    User Tools (System Settings) 68 3 Searching to select a registered e-mail de stination by fax n umber A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by Fax No. ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter the fax number of the destination you want to change using the number keys, an d then [...]

  • Página 81

    E-mail Destination 69 3 I I I I Select [ E- mail Settings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Enter the new e-mail ad dress us - ing the number keys an d the Quick Dial keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. K K K K When using the e-mail addres s as a sender, se lect[...]

  • Página 82

    User Tools (System Settings) 70 3 C Enter the characters of the des- tination you want to delete us- ing the number keys and the Quick Dial key s, and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Reference For detai ls about en tering text, see p.95 “ Entering Text ” . D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to delete u[...]

  • Página 83

    E-mail Destination 71 3 Searching to select a registered e-mail de stinati on by user code A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by User Code ] us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T } } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter the user code of the desti- nation you w ant delete us ing the number keys, and then press th[...]

  • Página 84

    User Tools (System Settings) 72 3 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Press [ Dest . ] . I I I I Select [ E- mail Settings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or {[...]

  • Página 85

    Registering Destinations to a Group 73 3 Registering Destinations to a Group Register destinati ons to a group to easily control registered fax, e-mail and folders for each group. To group dest ination s, the grou ps must be registered beforehand . Note ❒ You can regist er up to 10 g roups. Register ing a New Group A A A A Press the { { { { User [...]

  • Página 86

    User Tools (System Settings) 74 3 H H H H Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Programm ed ” message ap- pears, a nd then the “ Group ” dis- play returns. I I I I Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. Register ing a Destinati on to a Group A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Sett[...]

  • Página 87

    Registering Destinations to a Group 75 3 L L L L Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Programm ed ” message ap- pears, and then the “ Ad dres s Book ” display returns. M M M M Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. Deleting a Desti nation from a Group A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ S[...]

  • Página 88

    User Tools (System Settings) 76 3 Searching to select a destinat ion regi stered in a group fr om De stination List A Press [ Search ] . B Select [ Display Dest ination List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. C Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or [...]

  • Página 89

    Registering Destinations to a Group 77 3 D Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the destination you want to delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a destinat ion regi stered in a group b y e-mai l address A Press [ Search ] . B Select [ Search by E-mail Ad[...]

  • Página 90

    User Tools (System Settings) 78 3 Displayi ng the Destina tions Register ed in Groups A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Key Oper ator Tools ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or {[...]

  • Página 91

    Registering Destinations to a Group 79 3 C Select the group you w ant to display using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered group b y reg istrati on numb er A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by Registr ation No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T [...]

  • Página 92

    User Tools (System Settings) 80 3 C Enter the characters of the des- tination you want to change us- ing the number keys and the Quick Dial key s, and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Reference For detai ls about en tering text, see p.95 “ Entering Text ” . D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select the group you w ant to change using [...]

  • Página 93

    Registering Destinations to a Group 81 3 Deleting a Group A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Sy stem Setting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Key Oper ator Tools ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t[...]

  • Página 94

    User Tools (System Settings) 82 3 C Select the group you w ant to dele te u sin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered group b y reg istrati on numb er A Press [ Sear ch ] . B Select [ Search by Registr ation No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} [...]

  • Página 95

    83 4. Troubleshooting If Your Machine Doe s Not Operate As You Want The following chart gives explanations of common problems and messa ges. If other messages appear, follow the instructions displayed. Note ❒ For further “ Troubl esho otin g ” , refer to the other manuals for this machine. See p. i “ Manu als f or T his Ma chine ” . Probl[...]

  • Página 96

    Troubleshooting 84 4 Problem Cause s Solutions The main power indicator continues blinking and does not turn of f when pressed. This occurs in the follow- ing case: • The machine is commu- nicating with external equipment. Check if the machine is commu ni- cating with a comp uter. Original images are print- ed on the reverse side of the pa per. Y[...]

  • Página 97

    x Clearing Misfeeds 85 4 x x x x Clearing Misf eeds R CAUTION: Important ❒ When clearing misf eeds, do not turn off the power sw itch. If you do, your copy settings are c leared. ❒ To prevent m isfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside th e ma- chine. ❒ If paper misfeeds oc cur repea tedly, contact your service repres entative. No[...]

  • Página 98

    Troubleshooting 86 4[...]

  • Página 99

    x Clearing Misfeeds 87 4[...]

  • Página 100

    Troubleshooting 88 4 Changing the Paper Size Preparation Be s ure to sel ect the pa per siz e with User Tools and the paper size select or. If you do not, misf eeds might occur. See p.30 “ Tray Pape r Size: Tray 1 – 4 ” . Reference For details about paper sizes and types, see p.109 “ Copy Pa per ” . Changing t he Paper Size of t he Paper [...]

  • Página 101

    Changing the Paper Size 89 4 E E E E While pressing the releas e lever, adjust the side fences. F F F F Push the metal plate down. G G G G Square the pape r and set it in the tray. Important ❒ Be sure to set t he paper under the roller. ❒ Do not st ack pa per ov er the lim- it mark. H H H H While pressing the release lever, adjust the side and [...]

  • Página 102

    Troubleshooting 90 4 Changin g the Paper Size in th e Optional Paper Tray Unit A A A A Make sure the pap er tray is not in use. B B B B Pull out the paper tray until it stops. Note ❒ Remove any remaining copy paper. C C C C While pinchi ng the release lever, adjust the b ack fence. D D D D Press down the releas e button. E E E E While pressing th[...]

  • Página 103

    Changing the Paper Size 91 4 Important ❒ When sett ing small quanti tie s of copy pa per, be c areful not t o squeeze in the sid e fence too much or pa per will not feed in properly. H H H H Press down the lock button. I I I I Adjust the tray size to the new pa- per size using t he paper size se- lector. Note ❒ Be sure to set the correct size, [...]

  • Página 104

    Troubleshooting 92 4[...]

  • Página 105

    93 5. Other Functions Other Functions Displayi ng the Total Cou nter You can display t he total co unter val- ue used for all functions. A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Counter ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C To print the coun te[...]

  • Página 106

    Other Functions 94 5[...]

  • Página 107

    95 6. Entering Text Entering Text This section d escribes how to ent er characters. When you enter a c harac- ter, it appears at the cursor position. If there is a char acter already at the cur- sor pos itio n, th e newly entere d cha r- acter appears b efore it. Available Char acters • Alphabetic character s ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU- VWXY Zabcdefgh[...]

  • Página 108

    Entering Text 96 6 Enterin g lette rs A A A A Press the { { { { Shift } } } } key to switch be- tween uppercase a nd lowercase. B B B B Press a Quick Di al keys. A letter is entered and the cursor moves al ong one space. Note ❒ To enter a char acter repeate dly, repeat step B . ❒ To insert a cha racter, pre ss { { { {W W W W} } } } or { { { {V [...]

  • Página 109

    97 7. Security Security Confidential information is always at risk of being copied without pe rmission or subject to u nauthorized access th rough the net work. To protect docu ment s from such intrusion, not only can passwords be set, but also the Extended Security functio n can be used t o stre ngthen se curity. For those who require increased do[...]

  • Página 110

    Securit y 98 7 A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ System Se ttings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Key Ope rator Tools ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. D D[...]

  • Página 111

    Operating Environment and Notes 99 7 Operating Environment and Notes Security for this machine is assured on the pre mises that the machi ne is used un- der the following conditions: Operating Environmen t • The condition of the machin e is normal. (For example, it is not damaged, modified, or lacking comp onents.) • When the machine is connect[...]

  • Página 112

    Securit y 100 7[...]

  • Página 113

    101 8. Specifications Main Unit ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configuration : Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photose nsitivi ty type: OPC dr um ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original scanning: One-dimens ional soli d scanning sy stem throug h CCD ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy proces s: Dry electrostatic transfer system ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Develop ment: Dry two-component magnetic brush developmen[...]

  • Página 114

    Specifications 102 8 • Bypass (custom size): Vertical: 90 – 305 mm, 3.5" – 12.0" Horizontal: 148 – 1,260 mm, 5.8" – 49.6" • Duplex unit: A3 L – A5 KL , 11" × 17" L – 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy paper weight : • Paper trays (Stand ard size): 60 – 90 g/m 2 , 16 – 24 lb • By[...]

  • Página 115

    Main Unit 103 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy paper c apacity: Type 1: • Tray 1: 250 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 l b) • Bypass: 100 she ets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) Type 2, 3: • Tray 1, 2: 250 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) • Bypass: 100 she ets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power consumption: *1 Main un it with the optio nal ARDF, fax u nit, pri nter/scanner u[...]

  • Página 116

    Specifications 104 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Duplex un it (Type 3 only) • Paper size: A3 L , B4JIS L , A4 KL , B5JIS KL , A5 KL , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 13" L , 8 1 / 4 " × 13" L , 8 " × 13" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 7 1 / 4 " × 10 1 / 2 " KL , 8K L , 16K K[...]

  • Página 117

    Options 105 8 Options Exposure Gl ass Cover Lower this over originals. Auto Document Fee der (ADF) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode: • ADF mo de ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original size: • A3 L – A5 KL • 11" × 17" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original weight: • One-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m 2 (14 – 28 lb) ❖ ❖ [...]

  • Página 118

    Specifications 106 8 Auto Document Fee der capable of scanning both sides of a sheet (ARDF) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original size: • A3 L – A5 KL • 11" × 17" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original weight: • One-sided originals: 40 – 128 g/m 2 (11 – 34 lb) • Two-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m 2 (14 – 2[...]

  • Página 119

    Options 107 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Dimension (W × × × × D × × × × H) Unit: 222 × 478 × 104 mm Tray: 335 × 390 × 26 mm ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Weight: 2 kg (4 lb) or less Note ❒ Specifications are subject to c hange with out notice. Paper Tra y Unit (1 -tray type ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper weight: 60 – 105 g/m 2 (16 – 28 lb. ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Pape[...]

  • Página 120

    Specifications 108 8 Paper Tra y Unit (2 -tray type ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper weight: 60 – 105 g/m 2 (16 – 28 lb. ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper size: A3 L , B4 JIS L , A4 KL , B5 JIS KL , A5 L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 13" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" KL , 8 1 / 4 " × 13" L , 8" ?[...]

  • Página 121

    Copy Paper 109 8 Copy Paper Recommended Pap er Sizes and Types Th e fo llo win g l im itat i ons ap ply t o ea ch tr ay: Metr ic versi on Inc h ve rsion Pape r we ight Pa pe r ca pa c it y Paper tray 1 (Type 1) Paper tray 1, 2 ( Type 2 or 3) A3 L , B 4JIS L , A 4 KL , B5JIS KL , A5 K , 1 1" × 17 " L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 /[...]

  • Página 122

    Specifications 110 8 *1 Paper weight : 80 g/m 2 , 20 l b *2 When you set custom size paper in the bypass tray, You can specify the size. See Copy Reference . *3 8K(Ba-Ka i) = 267 × 390 mm, 10. 6" × 15.4" *4 16K(Shi-L ui-Kai) = 195 × 267 mm, 7.7" × 10.6" *5 Set one sheet at a time for you r needs. See Copy Reference . Importa[...]

  • Página 123

    Copy Paper 111 8 Reference To add pa per, see Copy Reference . To change the paper size, see p.88 “ Ch anging the Paper Size ” . Unusable Paper R CAUTION: Important ❒ Do not u se any of the following kind s of paper or a fault m ight occur: • Thermal fax paper • Art p aper • Aluminum foil • Carbon paper • Conductive pap er ❒ Do no[...]

  • Página 124

    Specifications 112 8 Paper Sto rage Note ❒ When storing paper, the following precautions sh ould always be followed: • Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight. • Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less). • Store on a flat surface. ❒ Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would u[...]

  • Página 125

    113 INDEX A Accessing user too ls (System Settings) , 26 Address Book Print List , 38 Program/Change/Delete Group , 37 Address book , 43 Address Book Manageme nt , 37 ADF , 13 AOF (Alw ays On ) , 38 ARDF , 13 , 106 Auto Document feeder (ADF) , 105 Auto off timer , 32 Auto reset timer , 32 copier , 33 facsimile , 33 scanner , 33 B Bypass tray , 12 C[...]

  • Página 126

    114 I If your machine does not operate as you want , 83 Internal optio ns , 14 Internal tray , 11 Internal Tray 2 (1 bin t ray) , 106 K Key Counter Man agement , 34 Key Op erator Code , 34 Key Op erator Tools , 34 Key Re peat , 29 L Letters , 96 Lower right cover , 12 M Main po wer ind icator , 12 Main po wer switch , 12 Main unit , 101 Measurement[...]

  • Página 127

    115 U Unusable paper , 111 User code (for machine with copier func tion only) , 39 User C ode Ma nagem ent , 34 User code (MFP) , 45 User Tools Men u (System Settings) , 23 V Vent ila tion ho les , 11[...]

  • Página 128

    116[...]

  • Página 129

    Decl arat ion of Conf ormi ty “ The Produc t compli es with th e requi rements o f the EMC Directiv e 89/33 6/EEC and its amendi ng di- rectives and the L ow Voltag e Direc tive 73/23 /EEC and i ts amend ing di rectives . ” In accord ance wi th IEC 60 417, this mach ine uses the follow ing sy mbols fo r the main power s witch: a a a a means POW[...]

  • Página 130

    Operating Instructions General Settings Guide GB GB B121-6500[...]

  • Página 131

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.80 0000 mm 2015/2018/2018D Operating Instructions Copy Reference RICO H COMP ANY, LT D. 15-5, Mi nami Aoyam a 1-chom e, Minato- ku, Toky o 107-8544 , Japan Phone: + 81-3-347[...]

  • Página 132

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.80 0000 mm Declar ation o f Conformi ty “ The Product complies wi th the re quiremen ts of the EMC Di rectiv e 89/336/E EC and its amendi ng di- recti ves and th e Low Vol[...]

  • Página 133

    i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the op erational procedures o f this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specif ic to machin e type. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view the man uals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 &[...]

  • Página 134

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite DeskTopB inder V2 Li te is a utility include d on the CD-ROM labe led "S canner Driv er & Do cume nt M ana ge ment Util itie s". • DeskTopBin der V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in detai[...]

  • Página 135

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ......... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ...... i Notice .......... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ... 1 How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ..... ........ ...... ..[...]

  • Página 136

    iv 3. Troubleshootin g If Your Machi ne Does Not Op erate As You Want... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 39 When a Message Is Dis played............. .......... ....... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......... . 39 If You Cannot Ma ke Clear Co pies....... ...... ....... ...... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ...[...]

  • Página 137

    v 6. Specifications Combinat ion Cha rt........ ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 63 Suppl ementary I nformati on . ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ . 64 INDE X.... ... .... .... ...... .... .... .... .... ...... .... .... ...[...]

  • Página 138

    vi KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge vi Tuesda y, Augu st 26, 2003 5:42 PM[...]

  • Página 139

    1 Notice Importa nt Do not c opy any item for which c opying is prohibited by l aw. Copying the following ite ms is generally prohibited by local law: bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, pass- ports, and driver's licenses. Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (optional ) Users Notice to Us ers in EEA Countr [...]

  • Página 140

    2 How to Read This Manual Symb ols The f ollowi ng set of symbol s is us ed in thi s manua l. R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious i njury when you misuse th e machine without fol lowing the in- struc tions unde r thi s symb ol. Be su re to read the in struc tions , all of wh ich [...]

  • Página 141

    3 Safety Information When using th is machine, t he following safety precau tions should always be fol- lowed. Safety Duri ng Operati on In th is ma nual, the follow ing imp ortant symbo ls are u sed: R WARNIN G: R WARNING: Indicates a potent ially hazard ous si tuation which, if instru ctions are not followed, could result in death or serious inju[...]

  • Página 142

    4 R CAUT ION: • Protect the machine from dampness or wet wea ther, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord wil l not be damag ed under the machine. • When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull t[...]

  • Página 143

    5 Positions of Labels and Hallmark s for R R R R WARNING and R R R R CAUTION Labels This ma chin e ha s la bels f or R WAR NING and R CAU TION at the positio ns shown below. For safety, please follo w the instructions and handle the machine as indi cated. AAI029S 1 1 KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 5 Tu esday, August 26, 2003 5: 42 PM[...]

  • Página 144

    6 Machi ne Types This ma chine co mes in three models which va ry by copy speed. T o make su re which mo del you have, see the i nside front co ver of th is manual. ❍ : Can be used with thi s type. — : Ca nnot b e used with this t ype. T y p e 1T y p e 2T y p e 3 Copy Sp eed 15 copi es/minu te (A4 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K ) 18 copies/mi[...]

  • Página 145

    7 Control Panel Note ❒ These illustr ations show Typ e 3. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Options fully installed 1. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to activate t he copier f unction. 2. Indicators Display errors and ma chine status. • h : Error indicator See “ Control Panel ” , General Set tings Guide . • D : Add Toner indica[...]

  • Página 146

    8 9. Main power indicator Ligh ts when t he main po wer sw itch is turned on. Referenc e p.11 “ Turning On the Power ” 10. On i n dic ator Lights when the operation switch is on. Referenc e p.11 “ Turning On the Power ” 11. Oper ation swi tch Press to turn the power on. The On indi- cator lights. To tu rn the power off, pres s agai n. Note [...]

  • Página 147

    9 Display This section explains how to read the display and use the Selection key for the initia l copy di splay. Note ❒ The copy display is se t as the d efault screen w hen the machine is turned on . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Initi al cop y displ ay 1. Operat ional status or mess ages 2. Messages and the selected tray appear here. Curre ntly selected ite[...]

  • Página 148

    10 2. { { { { Cancel } } } } key Press to cancel an operation or return to the previous display. 3. { { { { OK } } } } key Press to set a selected item or entered nu - meri c va lue . 4. Scroll keys Press to move the cursor to each direction one by one. When { { { {U U U U} } } } , { { { {T T T T} } } } , { { { {V V V V} } } } , or { { { {W W W W} [...]

  • Página 149

    11 Turning On t he Powe r This machi ne has two power swit ch- es. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Operation swit ch (right side of the contr ol pan el) Press to activate the machine. When th e machi n e has fini shed warming up, you can operate the mach ine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main power switch (l eft side of the ma- chine) Turning off this switch makes the main pow[...]

  • Página 150

    12 Turni ng Off th e Power A A A A Make sure the e xposure glass co v- er, ADF, or ARDF is in the right position. B B B B Press the operation switch. The On indi cato r goes of f. Note ❒ Even if you press the operation switch, th e indic ator does not go out, but blinks in the follow- ing cases: • During comm unication w ith external equipment.[...]

  • Página 151

    13 Saving Energy - - - - Auto Off / Low Power The ma chin e a ut oma tica lly tur ns it- self off when the j ob is finished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This funct ion is calle d “ Auto Off ” . Note ❒ You c an chang e the Au to Off time. See General Settings Guide . ❒ The Auto Off Timer function will not operate in the follo[...]

  • Página 152

    14 KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 14 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 153

    15 1. Placing Originals Origina ls Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Origina ls ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version *1 The optional ARDF is required. Note ❒ Abo ut 3 0 or ig inal s c an b e p lac ed in th e A DF. ❒ Abo ut 5 0 or ig inal s c an b e p lac ed in th e A RDF . Non-compatible ori ginals for the ADF or ARDF Pla[...]

  • Página 154

    Placing Origi nals 16 1 • Originals with any kind of coat ing, such as thermal fax paper, art pap er, alu- minu m foil , carb on pape r, or conduc tiv e paper • Originals with perfo rated lines • Origin als wi th in dexes, tags , or o ther pro jectin g parts • Sticky ori ginals su ch as tr anslucent paper • Thin, highly flexible originals[...]

  • Página 155

    Origin als 17 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Exposure glass ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ ADF or ARDF Note ❒ When you copy custom size original s, make sure yo u specify the size o f the originals. If not, the image may no t be c opied pr operly. S ee p.20 “ Placing cus- tom size orig inals ” . Sizes difficult to detect It is difficult for the machine t o detect the si[...]

  • Página 156

    Placing Origi nals 18 1 Placing Or iginals Note ❒ Take care to plac e origi n als only af - ter any corr ection fluid and ink has completel y dried. N ot taking thi s prec aution co uld ca use mark s on the exposure glass that will be cop- ied on to pape r. Referenc e For or igina l si zes y ou can set, see p.15 “ Or iginals ” . Original O ri[...]

  • Página 157

    Placin g Originals 19 1 Placing Or iginals in the ADF or ARDF Settings shou ld be made in the fol- lowing situations: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When placing custo m size originals: p.20 “ Placin g c ustom size origi - nals ” Note ❒ Do not st ack orig inals ove r the li m- it mark on the side fen ce of the ADF or A RDF. ❒ The last page should be on th[...]

  • Página 158

    Placing Origi nals 20 1 Placing custom size o riginals When placing cu stom size original s in the AD F, or ARDF, sp ecify th e size of the orig inals. Note ❒ Paper that has a vertical length of 105 – 297 mm (4.2" – 11. 6") and a hor- izontal length of 128 – 1260 mm (5.1" – 49.6") ca n be placed with this function. A A[...]

  • Página 159

    21 2. Copying Basi c Procedure A A A A If th e machine has u ser cod es se t, enter a user code (up to eight dig- its) using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. The ma chine is r eady to copy. Referen ce For user co des, se e “ Key Opera- tor Tools ” , General Setting s Guide . B B B B Make s ure &qu[...]

  • Página 160

    Copying 22 2 Copying from the By pass Tray Use th e bypa ss tray to co py onto O HP transpa rencies, th ick pa per, enve - lopes and copy paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays. Important ❒ Paper longer than 433 m m may be- come wrinkled, may not feed in, and may jam. Note ❒ If you do not use standard size copy paper, or if you us e spe[...]

  • Página 161

    Copying f rom the Bypass Tr ay 23 2 C C C C Insert the p aper w ith the side you want to copy facing down, and then adjust the paper guide with the paper si ze. 1. Horizontal size 2. Vertical size 3. Extender 4. Paper guid es Note ❒ If the guides are not flush against the copy paper, images might be skew ed or paper mis- feeds might occur. ❒ Do[...]

  • Página 162

    Copying 24 2 When copying onto custom size paper Importa nt ❒ You should specify the size of copy pa per to av oid pap er mis- feeds. A Select [ Paper Si ze ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select [ Cust om S ize ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then[...]

  • Página 163

    Copying f rom the Bypass Tr ay 25 2 B Select [ Regular Size ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. C Select the en velope size from [ C6 env L L L L ] [ C5 env L L L L ] [ DL env L L L L ] , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accepted ” messag e ap- pear s. D Press th [...]

  • Página 164

    Copying 26 2 Copier Functi ons Adjustin g Image Density You can adj ust copy im age density to match your or igina ls. If you require darker or lighter cop- ies, adjust image density accordingly. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Lighter } } } } or { { { { Darker } } } } key to adjust the density. Selecting Origina l Type Set ti ng Selec t one of the fol[...]

  • Página 165

    Copier Fu nctions 27 2 Auto Paper Select A A A A Make su re [ Auto Paper Sel ect ] is se- lected. Manual Paper Select A A A A Select t he paper t ray or bypa ss tray using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . The selected tray and the paper size appear. Referen ce p.22 “ Copying from the By pass Tray ” - - - - Rotated cop y If the o[...]

  • Página 166

    Copying 28 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Base Point The base point of Reduce/Enlarge differs depending o n how the or ig- inal is scanned. When the original is placed on the exposure gla ss, the upper l eft corne r is the ba se point. When placed in the A DF or ARDF, the bottom left corner is the base point. 1. Base point whe n placing on the exp osur e gl ass[...]

  • Página 167

    Copier Fu nctions 29 2 C C C C Enter the ratio. To select the ratio using { { { {U U U U} } } } and { { { {T T T T} } } } A Adjust the ratio using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . Note ❒ If y ou have inco rrectly en- tered the ra tio, readju st using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . ❒ To change t he ratio in in c[...]

  • Página 168

    Copying 30 2 A A A A Pre ss [ Au to R/E ] . B B B B Select the paper tray using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . C C C C Place your originals, and th en pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Sor t You can scan orig inals in to memory and automatically sort copies. Referenc e Related def ault settings p.53 “ A uto Tray Swit ching [...]

  • Página 169

    Copier Fu nctions 31 2 B B B B Sele ct [ Sort ] or [ Rota te Sort ] , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Enter the nu mbe r of copy set s us- ing the number k eys. D D D D Place your originals. Note ❒ When pl acing or iginals on the exposure glass, start from the first page to be copied. When plac in g o rig inal s in th e A DF o [...]

  • Página 170

    Copying 32 2 Original o rientation and completed copies The r esulting copy imag e will di ffer according to the orientation in which you place th e originals (verti cal K or horizontal L ). *1 The table shows the orienta tion of im- ages on the front and ba ck of copies, not the orientation of delivery. Note ❒ You cannot use t he bypass tray wit[...]

  • Página 171

    Copier Fu nctions 33 2 D D D D When sele cti ng tw o-s ided c opy- ing, se lect the orientat ion [ Top t o Top ] or [ Top to Botto m ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To change the copy orie ntation, select the o riginal icon whose orient ation is tha t requir ed. See p.32[...]

  • Página 172

    Copying 34 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ 2 Sided 2 Pages → → → → Combine 1 Side (Optional ARDF i s required ) Copies 2 two-sided orig inals o nto one si de of a s heet. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orientation of the o riginal and image positi on of combine Open to left R original s Open to top S originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Placing originals (i n the ADF or ARDF ) ?[...]

  • Página 173

    Copier Fu nctions 35 2 C C C C Select the orientation u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ The operations of step C is n ec- essary when [ Always Sp ecify ] is specified for [ O rientation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User Tools), you can select t he orientation o f originals.[...]

  • Página 174

    Copying 36 2 A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Combi ne/Seri es } } } } key. B B B B Select the combine mode usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select the orientation u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ The o[...]

  • Página 175

    Copier Fu nctions 37 2 Series Copi es You ca n se paratel y copy the f ront and back of a two-sided orig inal or two facing pages of a bound original onto two sh eets . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ 2 Sided → → → → 1 Sided (Optional ARDF is required) Copies each side of a two-sided origin al onto tw o separ ate pages. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Book → → → →[...]

  • Página 176

    Copying 38 2 C C C C When selecting [ Series:2 Sided Or ig. ] , select the orientatio n using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ The operati on of ste p C is nece s- sary when [ Always Spe cify ] is specified for [ O rientation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User Tools), you can select[...]

  • Página 177

    39 3. Troubleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Oper ate As You Want When a Message Is Dis played The following chart cont ains explanations for common messages. If other mes- sages appear, follow the instr uctions as they are displayed. Note ❒ For messages not listed here, see General S ettings Guide . Messa ge Causes Solutions Cannot de tect or[...]

  • Página 178

    Troublesh ooting 40 3 If You Cannot Make C lear Copies Prob lem C auses Sol utio ns Copies appear dirty . Image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.26 “ Adjusting Image Density ” . Auto Imag e De nsit y is not selected. Adjust the auto image densit y. See p.26 “ Adjusting Image Density ” . The reverse side of an orig- inal [...]

  • Página 179

    If You Cannot Ma ke Copies As Yo u Want 41 3 If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want This section e xplains causes and remedi es when copy result s are not as expect- ed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Basic ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Edit ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine Prob lem C auses Sol utio ns You can not com bine se ver- al fu nct io ns. Selecte d functions c annot be used tog[...]

  • Página 180

    Troublesh ooting 42 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Duplex (Type 3 only) When Memor y Is Ful l Problem Caus es Solutions Order of copies i s not cor- rect. You set or iginals in the in- correct order. When setting a stack of or iginals in the ADF or ARDF, the last page should be on the bottom. If you set an original on the expo- sure glass, start with the first [...]

  • Página 181

    B Loading Paper 43 3 B B B B Loading Paper Referenc e For paper types and sizes, see Gen- eral Settings Guide . Loading Paper Note ❒ You can change the paper size, see General Settings Guid e . ❒ This il lustr ation shows the paper trays (1 o r 2). A A A A Pull the paper tray out slowly un- til it stops. B B B B Square t he paper a nd load it i[...]

  • Página 182

    Troublesh ooting 44 3 Orientat ion-Fixed Paper or Two-Sided Pape r Orientation-fixe d (top to bottom) or two-sided paper (for example, letterhe ad paper, pr epunc hed paper , or copi ed paper) mi ght not print correctl y, depe nding on how the originals and paper are placed. Referenc e p.55 “ Letterhead Setting ” Note ❒ Select [ On ] in [ Let[...]

  • Página 183

    B Loading Paper 45 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Loaded p aper or ientatio n • For machine wi th copier functi on only AAI035S KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 45 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 184

    Troublesh ooting 46 3 • For MFP AAI023S KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 46 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 185

    D Adding Toner 47 3 D D D D Adding Toner When D appears , it is time to add ton er. Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Faults may occur if you use toner o ther than the r ecommended type. ❒ When addin g toner, do not turn off the o peration switch. If you d o, settings will be lost . ❒ Always add toner w hen the ma chine instru[...]

  • Página 186

    Troublesh ooting 48 3 Removing Toner • 1: Open the fron t cover of the machin e. • 2: Lift the green le ver. • 3: Push the green lever, and then gently pull out the h older. • 4: Press the toner bottle back to raise its top, and then gently pu ll it out. KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 48 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 187

    Insert ing Toner 49 3 Inserting Toner • 1: Hold the new bottle hori zontally and shake it from side to side five or six times. 2: Remove the black cap. Note ❒ Do not remove the black cap before shak ing . ❒ Do not remove the inner cap. • 3: Put the toner bottle on the holder, and then pull its top forwar d. • 4: Push in the green lever un[...]

  • Página 188

    Troublesh ooting 50 3 KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 50 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 189

    51 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Accessi ng User Tools (Copier Features) This sectio n is for key operator s in charge of this machin e. Key operat ors can change o r make default settings. Note ❒ B e s u r e t o q u i t U s e r T o o l s a n d r e - turn to the init ial c opy dis play when all settings ar e complete. This se ction d escri bes [...]

  • Página 190

    User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 52 4 Note ❒ To cancel changes made to set- ting and retur n to the init ial di s- play, pres s the { { { { User Tools/Counte r } } } } key. Quitting User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. The change is made, and the ma- chin e is rea dy to co py. O n Hook Dial On Hook Dial Pause/ Red[...]

  • Página 191

    Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 53 4 Settings You Can C hange with User Tools APS/ Auto R/E Priority You can sele ct [ Au to P aper Sele ct Prior i- ty ] ( APS Priorit y) or [ Auto R/E Priority ] (Auto Reduce/Enlarge Prior ity). When you canc el this sett ing, select [ Off ] . Note ❒ Default: Auto Paper Select P riority Auto Tray Switch[...]

  • Página 192

    User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 54 4 Duplex Mode Priority You can select the ty pe of Duplex fun ctio n ef fecti ve w hen t he m ach ine is turned on, reset, or modes are clea red. Limitatio n ❒ Ava ilab le on ly for Ty pe 3. Note ❒ Default: 1 Si ded → 1 Sided Orie ntatio n • Type 1, Ty pe 2 You ca n select the orig inal orienta - tion whe n[...]

  • Página 193

    Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 55 4 Preset R/E Priorit y You can set the ratio with priority when [ R/ E ] is selected. Note ❒ Default: • Metr ic ver sion: 71% • Inch ver sion: 65% Dup lex Mar gin You can specify left margin on the bac k side of copie s, a nd top marg in on th e fron t sid e. S elect [ Top Margin ] or [ Left Mar gi[...]

  • Página 194

    User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 56 4 KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 56 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 195

    57 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Do not tu rn the po wer off whi le the On indicator is lit or blinking. Doi ng so ma y dama ge th e mem o- ry. ❒ Before unplugging th e power co rd or turning off the m ain power switch, make sure remaining memory space is at 100%, a s shown on the di splay. See p .12 “ Turning O[...]

  • Página 196

    Remarks 58 5 Where to P ut Your Mac hine Machi ne En viron men t Choose your machi ne's locat ion c are- fully. Environmental conditions greatly affect its p erformance. Optimum environm ental conditions R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: • Temperat ure: 10- 32 ° C (50- 89.6 ° F) (humidit y to be 54 % at 32 ° C, 89.6 ° F) • Humi dity: 1 5-80% (te[...]

  • Página 197

    Where to Put Your Machine 59 5 Moving R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Be careful when m oving the ma- chine. Take the following pr ecau- tions: • Turn off the main powe r. Se e p.12 “ Turn ing Off the Ma in Power ” . • Unplu g the po wer co rd from the wall outlet . When you pull out the plug fro m the socket, grip the plug to av oid [...]

  • Página 198

    Remarks 60 5 Access to the Machi ne Plac e th e machi ne ne ar t he powe r source, pr oviding the clearanc e areas shown. 1. Rear : 5 cm (2") or m ore 2. Right: 25 cm (10") or more 3. Front: 75 cm (29.6") or more 4. Left: 15 cm (6") or more Note ❒ For the requ ired space whe n op- tions are insta lled, conta ct your service re[...]

  • Página 199

    Mainta ini ng You r Ma chine 61 5 Maintaining Yo ur Machine If the exposure glass, ex posure glass cover, A DF belt, or AR DF belt is dirty , copy clarity may be reduced. Clea n these par ts if they are dir ty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machin e Wipe the machine with a soft, damp clot h. Then wipe i t with a dry cloth to remo ve the water. Impo[...]

  • Página 200

    Remarks 62 5 KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 62 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 201

    63 6. Specifications Combination C hart The combination ch art below shows which f unctions can be used together. When you read the chart, see the following table: The f ollowi ng sho ws the com bin ation s of func tions. ❍ These functions can be used together . × These functions cannot be used tog ether. The first function selec ted will be the[...]

  • Página 202

    Specificat ions 64 6 Supplemen tary Informatio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass Tray Copy • The following paper sizes can be selected as standard sizes: A3 L , A4 KL , A5 KL , B4 JIS L , B5 JIS KL , B6 JIS L , 11" × 17" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11 " KL , 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " L , 7 1 / 4 " × 10[...]

  • Página 203

    Supplemen tary Info rmatio n 65 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Zoom • The repr oducti on rat ios you c an sp ecify ar e 50 – 200%. • You can s elect a rat io regard less of the size of an or iginal or copy pape r. With so me rati os, par ts of th e ima ge might not be co pied or mar gins wi ll appear o n copies. ❖ ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 204

    Specificat ions 66 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine • When usi ng this functi on, the mac hine selec ts the reprod uction ra tio auto- matically. This reproduction ra tio depends on copy paper siz es and the numb er o f orig ina ls. • The repr oducti on rat ios you c an sp ecify ar e 50 – 200%. • If the c alcul ated ratio i s unde r the minim um r[...]

  • Página 205

    67 INDEX 1 Sid ed → 2 Sided , 31 2 Sid ed → 1 Sided , 37 2 Sid ed → 2 Sided , 31 A Accessing us er tools copier feature s , 51 Adding toner , 47 Adjusting image den sity , 26 Auto paper selec t , 26 reduce/enl arge , 29 tray switch ing , 53 Auto Off / Low Power , 13 Auto pa per s elec t , 27 B Basic procedu re , 21 C Cancel key , 8 Changing d[...]

  • Página 206

    68 L Lighter and D arker , 8 Loadi ng pape r , 43 M Machi ne e nvir onm ent , 58 Main po wer in dicator , 8 Main po wer switch , 11 Maintain ing , 61 Manual pap er select , 27 Messag es , 39 Missin g image area , 17 Movin g , 59 N Non-comp atible or iginals fo r the AD F or ARDF , 15 Numb er ke ys , 8 O OK key , 8 One-sided combine 1 side d 2 pages[...]

  • Página 207

    69 storage , 47 used , 47 Toner stora ge , 47 Troublesh ooting , 39 memory i s full , 42 you cannot make clear copies , 40 you cannot make copies as you want , 41 your mach ine does n ot operate as yo u want , 39 Turnin g Off main p ower , 12 power , 12 Turnin g On , 11 main p ower , 11 power , 11 Two-sided combine 1 side d 4 pages → combine 2 s [...]

  • Página 208

    70 GB GB B121-66 00 MEMO KirC2_ GBcopyF _FM. book Pa ge 70 T uesday , Augus t 26, 2 003 5 :42 PM[...]

  • Página 209

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.80 0000 mm Declar ation o f Conformi ty “ The Product complies wi th the re quiremen ts of the EMC Di rectiv e 89/336/E EC and its amendi ng di- recti ves and th e Low Vol[...]

  • Página 210

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 3.80 0000 mm 2015/2018/2018D Operating Instructions Copy Reference RICO H COMP ANY, LT D. 15-5, Mi nami Aoyam a 1-chom e, Minato- ku, Toky o 107-8544 , Japan Phone: + 81-3-347[...]

  • Página 211

    Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Operating I nstructions Scanner Reference For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it. Networ k Scanner Prepa ratio ns for Use as a N etwork Sc anner Settin g Origin als Sendin g Scan F iles by E-mail Using the Networ k D[...]

  • Página 212

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. The scan ner fu[...]

  • Página 213

    i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the re levant parts o f the manual . Note ❒ The manuals provided are s pecific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are pr ovided: • CD-ROM 1[...]

  • Página 214

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM la beled "Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities". • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes t he install ation of Des kTopBi nder V2 Lite, an d the ope rating en- vironme nt fo r DeskTo pB[...]

  • Página 215

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ......... ...... ....... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ...... 1 Symbols .. ...... ....... ...... ......... ...... ....... ...... ...... ........[...]

  • Página 216

    iv 5. Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function Preparation for Delivering ......... ......... ........ ......... ....... ......... ......... ........ ....... ........ 51 Network Delive ry Sca nner S creen ... ...... ......... ...... ....... ...... ......... ...... ....... ...... ......... . 5 2 Delivering Scan Files ............ ....... ........[...]

  • Página 217

    1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: Important If this instruc tion is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or files might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations requ ired before op- erating. Note This symb ol indi[...]

  • Página 218

    2 Names of Major Opt ions Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual: • Exposure Glas s Cover • Auto Document Feeder → ADF • Auto Document Feeder capable of scanning both si des of a she et → ARDF • Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 → printer/scanner c ontroller The following software products ar e referred t[...]

  • Página 219

    3 1. Network Scanner Outline By installing the printer/sc anner controller, the machine can be used as a net- work scanner . As a network scanner, the machi ne can send s can files by e-mail, operate as a net- work delivery sca nner, and operate as a network TWAIN scanner. E-mail Scan files that are attached to a n e-mail can be se nt using the e-m[...]

  • Página 220

    Network Scanner 4 1 Network De livery Scanner The machine is used as a delivery scanner with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profession- al. Scan files are stored i n the delivery server and delivered to the folders of c li- ent computers on the same network. Reference p.51 “ Using the Netw ork Deli very Sc anner F uncti on ” Note ❒ When the optional Scan[...]

  • Página 221

    Outline 5 1 Reference For more information about ScanRouter V2 L ite, DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, or Auto Document Link, see p.i “ Manuals for This Machine ” . Network T WAIN Scan ner The scan ning func tion of this m achine ca n be u sed from a clien t computer via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) [optional], or IEEE 802.11b (Wire- les[...]

  • Página 222

    Network Scanner 6 1 Control Panel This illustration sh ows the control panel when options ar e installed. 1. { { { { Searc h D est ina tio n } } } } key Press to sea rch for the destinatio n from the Destination L ist. 2. { { { { Check Des tination } } } } key Press to check the de stinations curre ntly selected. 3. { { { { Job Information } } } } [...]

  • Página 223

    Control Panel 7 1 14. Qui ck Dial ke ys Press to select the registered destin ation with a sing le to uch , or to e nter lett ers a nd symbols. Reference For mo re i nforma tion, se e General Settings Guide . Note ❒ You can regist er up to 32 de stinati ons using the Quick Dial keys. 15. Quick Dial Flip Plate Flip thi s plate down to a ccess Quic[...]

  • Página 224

    Network Scanner 8 1 Reading t he Displ ay and Using Ke ys This sect ion explai ns how to read t he display and use the sel ection ke y. Note ❒ The copy screen is set as the default screen when the machi ne is turned on. You can ch ange the s ettings in [ Sy stem Set tings ] . See General Setting Guide. 1. Selection keys Correspond t o items at th[...]

  • Página 225

    9 2. Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner To use the machin e as a network scan ner, you must make settings requ ired for use as a scan ner as well as bas ic settings for use in a network. Reference Firs t, se e General Setting s Guide for details about how to make basic settin gs, and then m ake sc anner sett ings. For more information about [...]

  • Página 226

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 10 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destination Lis t Settings For explanations of settings, s ee p.14 “ Destination List S ettings ” . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Send Settings For explanations of settings, s ee p.14 “ Send Settings ” . Setting procedure A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. Sett ings D e[...]

  • Página 227

    Initial Scanner Setup 11 2 B B B B Select [ Scanner Featur es ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Selec t a menu using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Select a setting using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T[...]

  • Página 228

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 12 2 G G G G Repeat steps C C C C to F F F F to make other settings. H H H H Press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. The main menu appears. Scan Se ttings This section explains how to set the defaults for scan settin gs. The scan settings consist of the fol- lowing. F or the list about s ettings and defaults,[...]

  • Página 229

    Initial Scanner Setup 13 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig. Orientation Priority Select th e default for origin al placement orientation. When orig- inals are a lways posi tion ed the same way, sele ct that orien tati on as the default to make operat ion easier. Reference p.31 “ Or iginal O rient ation and Scan Are a ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original Type Set ti[...]

  • Página 230

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 14 2 Destinat ion List Settings This section explains how to set the defaults for the destination list dis- played. The destination list settings consist of the following. F or the list abou t set- tings and defaults, see p.9 “ Scanner Features ” . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destina tion List Priorit y Select a de[...]

  • Página 231

    Initial Scanner Setup 15 2 Note ❒ When [ On ] is selected, all records are deleted after print- ing. When [ Off ] is selected, records that exceed the limit are automatically deleted from the oldest records. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Max. E-mail Size Select whether the si ze of an e-mail with a scan file attached is limited or no t. When [ On ] is selected[...]

  • Página 232

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 16 2 Important ❒ It is recommended that a send - er's password be set to prevent t h e s e n d e r ' s n a m e f r o m b e i n g misuse d. ❒ When [ On ] is s elected for [ Key Operator Co de ] in [ Key Operator Tools ] of [ System Set tings ] and [ On: Parti al ] is se t fo r th e ra nge, ente[...]

  • Página 233

    Installing Software 17 2 Installing Software The m ach ine comes w ith th ree C D-R OMs contai ning vari ous so ftw are. The CD-ROM labeled “ S canner Driver & Docume nt Managemen t Utiliti es ” co n- tains the necessary softw are to use the machine as a network scanner. The CD- ROM labeled “ Printer Driver & Utili ties ” contains t[...]

  • Página 234

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 18 2 The install ing sequence using Auto Ru n is as follows. For information about the software that can be installed by Auto Run, see p.21 “ Software Supplied o n CD-ROM ” . Installation Sequence The installer starts up. The installation complete message is displayed. Select the software. Insert the CD[...]

  • Página 235

    Installing Software 19 2 Software for Usi ng a Network TWAIN Scan ner To use the m achine a s a net work TWAI N scanne r, it is essential to in stall the TWAIN dr iver. I f y o u d o n o t h a v e a p p l i c a t i o n s t h a t w o r k w i t h T W A I N , i t i s n e c e s s a r y t o a l s o install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. For information about th[...]

  • Página 236

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 20 2 Software f or Using the Network Del ivery Scanne r Functio n To use the machine as a network delivery sc anner, it is essential to instal l Scan- Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To check an in-tray or retrieve files, it is necessary to install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the cli ent computer. Use A[...]

  • Página 237

    Installing Software 21 2 DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite Use Auto Run for installation. Preparation Before installation, check the system requi rements for De skTopBinder V2 Lite. See p.22 “ Des kTopBinde r V2 Lit e ” . A A A A Start Windows, and then insert the sup plied CD-ROM labeled “ Sc anner Driver & Document Management Utilities ” into th[...]

  • Página 238

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 22 2 DRIV ERST WAIN ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System requirements Limitatio n ❒ Under Windows NT with RISC-base d processors (MIPS R series, Alpha AXP, or PowerPC), this driver is not available. • Hardware PC/AT compatible • CPU Pentium or faster (Pentium 150 MHz or faster rec ommended) • Oper atin g system[...]

  • Página 239

    Installing Software 23 2 UTIL ITYD ESKV 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System requirements • Hardware PC/AT compatible • CPU Pentium 133 MHz or faster (Penti um II 266 MHz or faster recommended) • Oper atin g system Micr osof t Wind ows 95 (OSR 2 or l ater ) Micr osof t Wind ows 98 Micr osof t Wind ows Mi lle nniu m Edi tion Microsoft Windows 2000 Profe[...]

  • Página 240

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 24 2 ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter V2 Lite is to be installed on the delivery server. Scan files can be sort- ed in the deliver y server, stored in s pecified in-trays, or sa ved in folders of clien t computers on the same network. Reference See ScanRouter V2 Lite H elp or the manuals for ScanRouter V2 Lite[...]

  • Página 241

    Installing Software 25 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Software instal led with ScanRouter V2 Lite • ScanRouter V2 A dministrat ion Utili ty ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility manages the delivery system run by ScanR outer V2 Li te. You can regis ter destination an d sender in formation for the s can files in the delive ry server . In addition, you ca n perf[...]

  • Página 242

    Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 26 2[...]

  • Página 243

    27 3. Setting Originals This chapter ex plains the proced ure for placing original s on the exposure glass and in the ADF, and setting the original scan area and orientation according to the placement method. To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a cli- ent computer, the plac ement of the original and the settin[...]

  • Página 244

    Setting Originals 28 3 Placing on the Exp osure Gla ss Originals which do not fit into the ADF, such as sh eets wi th glued-on parts, books, etc., can be placed di- rectly on the exposure glass for scan- ning. Note ❒ For information about the origi- nals which can be pl aced on th e ex- posure glass , see Copy R eference . A A A A Lift the exposu[...]

  • Página 245

    Placing Originals 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When plac ing the original so that the t op edge touche s the t op left of the exposure glass Wh en us ing the m ach ine as a network TWAIN sca nner , thi s orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river. Nor- mally , use this or ienta tion fo r placing originals. 1. Positioning mark C C C C Lower[...]

  • Página 246

    Setting Originals 30 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When placing the origi nals so that the top ed ges touc h the back of the ADF ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When placing the top e dges of the originals firs t Wh en us ing the m ach ine as a network TWAIN sca nner , thi s orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river. Nor- mally , use this or ienta tion fo r [...]

  • Página 247

    Original Orientation and Scan Area 31 3 Original Orientation and Scan Area To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of a scanned original on a client compute r, original orien tation must be set when placing th e origin al. When using the e-mail fu nction or the network deliver y scanner function, settings are made on the c ontrol pa nel of [...]

  • Página 248

    Setting Originals 32 3 ❒ The duplex functi on is avail able only wh en you hav e in stalled the option al ADF cap able of scanning both sid es of a sheet (ARDF). Orientatio n selection A Select [ Original Orientat ion ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select the icon for the sa[...]

  • Página 249

    Original Orientation and Scan Area 33 3 B When originals of the same width and different l ength are placed, select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns . Note ❒ When [ Off ] is selected and [ A[...]

  • Página 250

    Setting Originals 34 3 Scanning Originals in Several Times using the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the originals. Reference p.27 “ Pla cin g O ri g ina ls ” Note ❒ Or ig ina ls a re sca nn e d in o rd er . Place them from the first page. B B B B Make setti ngs for scanning area and original orien tation. Reference p.31 “ Original Or ientatio[...]

  • Página 251

    35 4. Sending Scan Files by E-mail Scan files ca n be sent from this machine to a specifi ed destination using e-mail. This chapter explains the preparation for sending scan files by e-mail, various display screens, procedures for se nding, and how to che ck the sending r esult when this function is us ed. Preparation for Sending by E-mail To send [...]

  • Página 252

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 36 4 E-ma il Sc reen These screen s are shown when u sing the machine f or e-mail . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinat ion i s select ed. 1. E-mail icon ( ) Indicates tha t the E-mail sc reen is dis- played. 2. Destination field Displays the selected dest ination. If multiple d estinat ions a[...]

  • Página 253

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 37 4 Sending Scan Files by E-mail Procedu re for Sending by E- mail Scan fil es are se nt after specifying scan settin gs and destinations. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key. B B B B If the user codes are set, enter a user code u sing the numbe r keys , and th en pr ess the { { { { # } } } } key. The initial[...]

  • Página 254

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 38 4 Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick D ial key in which the d estination is regis- tered. Reference For more information about how to register the destina- tion, see General Setting s Guide . B To select more destinations, re- peat step A A A A . Note ❒ To deselect a destination, pres[...]

  • Página 255

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 39 4 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D . Note ❒ To deselect a destination, press { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } to display the destination in the [...]

  • Página 256

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 40 4 C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D . Note ❒ To deselect a destination, press { { { {U U U U} } } } or {[...]

  • Página 257

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 41 4 Manual entry o f an e-mai l address A Press [ Manual ] . B Enter the e-mail address. Note ❒ Letters, number, and periods can be used. T he symbols (),;: ” canno t be used. Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see Gen er- al Settings Guide . C Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To c[...]

  • Página 258

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 42 4 H H H H Specify the e-mail send er. To speci fy a se nder, you can se lect it using the Quick Dial key, search for an d selec t it fr om the Des tina - tion List, or select it by specifying a registration number. A Press [ Options ] . B Select [ Sender's Name ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} }[...]

  • Página 259

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 43 4 C For receivin g a return receipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns . Note ❒ When [ On ] is selected, an e- mail notifying that the e-[...]

  • Página 260

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 44 4 Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s. Enter the sender's password using the n umber k eys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. If the password en tered is correct, the sender name is displayed. E Press the { { { [...]

  • Página 261

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 45 4 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receivin g a return receipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” messag[...]

  • Página 262

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 46 4 Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s. Enter the sender's password using the n umber k eys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. If the password en tered is correct, the sender name is displayed. D Press the { { { [...]

  • Página 263

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 47 4 D Select the sender using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s. Enter the sender's password using the n umber k eys, and then press the { { { { OK [...]

  • Página 264

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 48 4 Man ual en try of a su bject A Select [ Manual Input ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter a subject, an d then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns . Note ❒ Whe[...]

  • Página 265

    Checking the Status of E-mail 49 4 Checking the S tatus of E-mail The status of the l ast 50 sendings can be checked. For every new sending record after 50, the oldest record is delete d. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted. Note ❒ When [ Print&Del. Scanner Journal ] is set to [ On ] , the whole sca[...]

  • Página 266

    Sending Scan Files by E-mail 50 4[...]

  • Página 267

    51 5. Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function Scan files can be se nt to a specified destination using the network delivery scan- ner function. Th is chapter explains the p reparation sequence, v arious display scre ens, deli ver y proced ures, an d how to check the deli very result wh en this function is u sed. Important ❒ A delivery server [...]

  • Página 268

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 52 5 Network Deli very Scann er Screen These scre ens are shown when usi ng the machine as a network delivery scanner. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinat ion i s select ed 1. Network Deliv ery Scanner icon () Indicates that the Network Delivery Scann er screen i s displ ayed. 2[...]

  • Página 269

    Preparation for Delivering 53 5 6. [ Add Dest ] When selecting multiple destinations afte r a m anu al ent ry of a e- mail ad- dress, press [ Add Dest ] , a nd then enter the e-ma il addr es s of the de stina tion. 7. [ EditDest ] When changing the e-mail address that has bee n entered , press [ Edit Dest ] , and then re-ent er the e-mail address.[...]

  • Página 270

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 54 5 Delivering Scan Files Delivery Procedure Scan files are delivered after scan set- tings and destinations are s pecified. If necessary , you c an sel ect a se nder an d a subject. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key. B B B B If the user codes are set, enter a user code u sing the numbe r key[...]

  • Página 271

    Delivering Scan Files 55 5 Note ❒ When using Sc anRouter V2 Lite/Professional , the Destina- tion List is updated automati- cally. Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick D ial key in which the d estination is regis- tered. Reference For more information about how to register the destina- tion, see General Setting s Guid[...]

  • Página 272

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 56 5 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D . Note ❒ To deselect a destination, press { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } to display the dest[...]

  • Página 273

    Delivering Scan Files 57 5 C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D . Note ❒ To deselect a destination, press { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T[...]

  • Página 274

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 58 5 Manual entry o f a de stinatio n Note ❒ When using ScanRouter V2 Pro- fessional, it is possible to enter the e-ma il addr ess of the de sti- nation directl y. However, set- ting s for s endi ng e- mail must b e made i n adva nce. A Press [ Manual ] . B Enter the e-mail address. Note ❒ It is possi[...]

  • Página 275

    Delivering Scan Files 59 5 Note ❒ When a sender is s elected, the sender name is au tomati- cally placed in the From field of the e-mail so that the send- er ca n b e i den tif ie d b y th e r e- cipien t. Using a Quick Dial key to select a sender A Press the Quick D ial key in which the s ender is registered. Reference For more information about[...]

  • Página 276

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 60 5 C Enter the b eginning of the sender name, and then p ress the { { { { OK } } } } key twice. Note ❒ Enter the first character or characters of the sender nam e. ❒ It is nec essary to differentiate between up percase and low- erca se. Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see G[...]

  • Página 277

    Delivering Scan Files 61 5 B Select [ Di spla y De stina tion List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Select the sender using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” messag[...]

  • Página 278

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 62 5 C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a sender using the number keys , and the n pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key twice. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receivin g a return r[...]

  • Página 279

    Delivering Scan Files 63 5 B Enter a subject, an d then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message ap- pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns . Note ❒ When the subje ct to be en- tered exceeds 64 cha racters, “ U ” appears. When sel ecting a subject from the list A Select [ Select Programmed Sub- ject ] usi n[...]

  • Página 280

    Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 64 5 Checking the S tatus of De livery The status of the last 50 deliveries can be ch ecked. For ev ery ne w deli very record after 50, the oldest record is delete d. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted. Note ❒ When [ Print&Del. Scanner Journal ] is set to[...]

  • Página 281

    65 6. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function This chapter describes the operations for scanning originals with the network TWAIN scanner using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. In addition, the preparation for using the netw ork TWAIN sc anner and s ome functi ons of the TWAIN d river are introduced. Preparation for Using the Network TWAIN Scanner To use th[...]

  • Página 282

    Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 66 6 Scanning Originals This section explains how t o scan originals usi ng the network TWAIN scanner function . A A A A Start DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, and then select t he scanner driver. A On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Program ] , poi nt to [ Desk Top- Binder V2 ] , and th en click [ Desk- TopBinder V2 ][...]

  • Página 283

    Scanning Originals 67 6 Note ❒ For advanced set tings, click [ Detail ] to display the Detai l window. F or info rmation about the Detail window, see TWAIN drive r Help. C According to the settings of [ Document ] and [ Orientation: ] , change the other setting of the [ Document ] group. Reference p.33 “ For a Network TW AIN Scanner ” For inf[...]

  • Página 284

    Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 68 6 Functions of the TWAI N Driver The following is an introduction to the various functions of the TWAIN dri ver: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Automatic Tilt Correction This function automatically cor- rects charac ter strings that were scanned sla nted. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing to the Image This function allows y ou t[...]

  • Página 285

    69 7. Appendix Relationship between Resolution and File Size Resolution and sca n area are inve rsely related. The higher the r esolution is set, the smaller the area that can be scanned. Converse ly, the larger the scan area, the lower the resolution that can be set. The relationship between th e scanning resolution and the file s ize is shown be-[...]

  • Página 286

    Appendix 70 7 Max. Number of Addres ses Which Can Be Specified *1 Up to 50 addresses can be entered di rectly. All remaini ng addresses have to b e spec- ified using the register ed ones. *2 The maximum number of addresses which c an be specified varies depending on the software you use, ScanRou ter V2 Lite or ScanRout er V2 Professional. For more [...]

  • Página 287

    Troubleshooting 71 7 Troubleshooting This section contains advice on wha t to do if you have probl ems scanning an origina l, or if the net work deli very scanner or e- mail funct ion does no t work . Various messages that may appear on the control panel or cli ent computer are listed, along with causes and so lutions. When Scanning Is Not Performe[...]

  • Página 288

    Appendix 72 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Cont rol Panel Note ❒ If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again. If the message still appears, note the conten t of the message and the error number (if li sted in the table), and contact your servic[...]

  • Página 289

    Troubleshooting 73 7 Exceede d max. page ca paci ty. Do you want t o send the sc anned da ta? Sca nned data wi ll b e cl eare d wh en sel ecti ng [No]. Because the nu mber of pages has reached the maximu m number that can be se nt, the dat a u p to t his poi nt is sent. Scan the remaining pages af- ter transmissi on. Exceede d ma x.me mory cap a. S[...]

  • Página 290

    Appendix 74 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Cli ent Computer This section describes the main possible c auses and actions for error mes sages displayed on the client c omputer when the TWAIN driver is used. Note ❒ If an error message that is not contained in this section app ears, turn off the main power switch of the machine, and then tu[...]

  • Página 291

    Troubleshooting 75 7 [ Clear Misfeed(s) in ADF. ] Remove the jammed originals. When origi- nals are misfed, place them again. Check whether the originals are suitable to be scanned by the m achine. [ Communication error has occurred on the network. ] C heck whether the client computer can use the TCP/IP protocol. [ Error has occurred in the scanner[...]

  • Página 292

    Appendix 76 7 [ Scanner is in use for o ther function. Pleas e wait. ] A function of the machine other t han the scanner function is being used such as t he copier function. Wait for a while a nd recon- nect. [ Scanner is not available. Check the scan ner connec- tion s tat us. ] • Check whether the main power switch of the machine is tu rned off[...]

  • Página 293

    Specifications 77 7 Specifications *1 Scanning speed s vary acco rding to machine operat ing condi tions, comput er (speci- fication, netwo rk traffic, and so ftware, etc.), and orig inal types. Scan method Flatbed scanning Scan sp eed *1 • E-mail/Network Delivery Scanner Approx .43 pages/m inute [Scan s ize:A4 R , Original type: Text(Print), R e[...]

  • Página 294

    78 INDEX A Automatic T ilt Correction , 68 Auto run program , 17 C Checking th e status of de livery , 64 Checking the Status of E- mail , 49 Comp re ssi on , 14 Cont rol Panel , 6 D Default Scan Settings , 12 Delivering S can Files , 54 Delivery Procedure , 54 Check ing se lected de stinatio ns , 58 Manual entry of a destination , 58 Manual entry [...]

  • Página 295

    79 P Plac ing Or iginals , 27 Placing on the expos ure glass , 28 Placing original in the Auto Document Feed er (ADF ) , 29 Preparation for Delivering , 51 Preparatio n for Sendin g by E-mail , 35 Previ ew , 67 Print & D el. Scanne r Journal , 14 Prin tin g to th e ima ge , 68 Procedure for Sending by E-mail , 37 Check ing se lected de stinatio[...]

  • Página 296

    80 GB GB B622-8581[...]

  • Página 297

    In accord ance wi th IEC 60 417, this mach ine uses the follow ing sy mbols fo r the main power s witch: a a a a means POWE R ON. c c c c means STAND BY. Decl arat ion of Conf ormi ty “The Produc t compli es with th e requi rements o f the EMC D irectiv e 89/336/EEC and its amendi ng di- rectives and the L ow Voltag e Direc tive 73/23 /EEC and i [...]

  • Página 298

    Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Operating Instructions Scanner Reference GB GB B622-8581[...]

  • Página 299

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Printer/Scanner Un it Type 2018 Operating Instructio ns Printer Reference 1 Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Operat ing In structio ns Printer Reference 1 For s afe and co rr[...]

  • Página 300

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Declar ation o f Conformi ty “The Pro duct complie s with the require ments of the EMC Directi ve 89/33 6/EEC and its amending di - rectiv es and the Low Vo ltage Dir ect[...]

  • Página 301

    i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the op erational procedures o f this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specif ic to machin e type. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view the man uals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1?[...]

  • Página 302

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Bin der V 2 L ite is a util ity i ncl uded on t he C D-R OM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Do cume nt M ana ge ment Util itie s ” . • DeskTopBin der V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in [...]

  • Página 303

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ......... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ...... i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ..... ........ ...... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ... 1 1. Getting Started Control Pane l......... ..... ........ ..... ..... .....[...]

  • Página 304

    iv KirC2- GB-Pref 1-F_FM. book Pa ge iv Monday, Septem ber 8, 2 003 2: 43 PM[...]

  • Página 305

    1 How to Read This Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the followi ng symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially h azardous situat ion which, if instru ctions are not foll owed , c ould res ult in de ath or seri ous i nju ry. R CAUTIO N: This symbo l indicates a potentially h azardous situat ion which, if instru ctions are no t [...]

  • Página 306

    2 Names of Major Options The followi ng software produc ts are referred to using a gen eral name: • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 professional → DeskTop- Binde r V2 Lit e/pro fessi onal • Sca nRou te r V2 Lit e an d S can Rout er V2 p ro fes sion al ( opti on al) → Sc anR out er V2 Lite/professional KirC2- GB-Pref 1-F_FM. book [...]

  • Página 307

    3 1. Getting Started Control Panel 1. { { { { Printer } } } } key Press to activate the printer func tion. 2. Indicators Displays errors and ma chine status. h : Error indicator. S ee Ne twor k Gui de and Gen eral Settings Guide . B : Load Paper indicator. See Copy Refer- ence . D : Add Toner indicator. See Copy R efer- ence . 3. Disp lay Displays [...]

  • Página 308

    Getting Sta rted 4 1 14. { { { { OK } } } } key Press to set a selected item or entered nu - meri c va lue . 15. Numbe r k eys Press to enter numeric val ues. Reading t he Display and Usi ng Keys This section explains how to r ead the display and using the selection ke y for the initia l displa y. Note ❒ The copy disp lay is set a s the defa ult [...]

  • Página 309

    5 2. Preparin g to Pri nt This section gi ves instructions for connecti ng the machine and computer, config- uring the m achine, and instal ling software. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When operating the mach ine with a USB connection , parallel connection, or IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) conne ction • Connect the mac hine and computer using a USB cable, a parallel [...]

  • Página 310

    Preparing to Print 6 2 Connecting the machine to the host using a USB cable You can connect the machi ne to the host computer using a U SB interf ace cabl e. This machine does not com e with a USB interf ace cabl e. Make sure you purc has e the app rop riate cable for the machi ne and you r comput er. Follow the p rocedure below t o con - nect the [...]

  • Página 311

    Prepari ng the Machine 7 2 A A A A Turn off the main po wer switche s of the machine and computer. Importa nt ❒ Before turning off the mai n powe r swi tch , see “ Turn ing Of f the Power ” , Copy Referenc e . B B B B Plug the cable into the connector on the machine’s interface. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Parallel Conn ection ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ IEEE 1394[...]

  • Página 312

    Preparing to Print 8 2 ❒ Be su re to se t the p aper wit h the side you want to print facing down in the bypass tray. ❒ When loading OHP transparencies or thic k paper in t he byp ass tr ay, make the paper sett ing using the control p anel or p rinter dr iver. ❒ The number of shee ts that can be loaded in t he bypass tra y depends on the pa p[...]

  • Página 313

    Prepari ng the Machine 9 2 ❒ Fan the pape r to get a ir betw een the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet feed. ❒ When setting an OHP transpar- ency, mak e sure that its front and back sides are properl y po- sitioned. ❒ Sele ct pape r type wh en prin ting onto OHP transpar encies or thick paper (over 10 5g/m 2 ). For detail s, see p.11 “ Setting [...]

  • Página 314

    Preparing to Print 10 2 Setting custom size paper Note ❒ Custom sizes can al so be set using the printer driver. Th e follow ing procedures are not necess ary when setting custom sizes using the p rinter driver . ❒ Custom size settings set using the printer driver ha ve prio rity ov er those set u sing the machine's co n- trol pa nel. ❒ [...]

  • Página 315

    Prepari ng the Machine 11 2 Setting thick paper or OHP transparencies Note ❒ Paper settings ca n also be set using the printer driver. Th e follow ing procedures are not necess ary when setting paper sizes using the print er dri ver. ❒ Paper size settings set using the printer driver ha ve prio rity ov er those set u sing the machine's co [...]

  • Página 316

    Preparing to Print 12 2 C C C C Sele ct [ Tray Paper Setting s ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Sele ct [ Pape r Type :Bypas s Tray ] us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Sele ct [ Thick Pape r ] usin[...]

  • Página 317

    Install ing the Sof tware 13 2 Installing the Softwar e This manual assumes you ar e familiar with general Windows procedures and practices. If you a re not, see th e operating instructions that come with Windows for details. The proc edure for installing the print- er driver depends on th e connection with the co mputer . With a paral lel or Ether[...]

  • Página 318

    Preparing to Print 14 2 The f oll owin g table show s the print er driver s and sof tware that can be in- stalled using Auto Run: *1 Available operating systems are: Win- dows 95/98 /Me, Windows 2000 /XP, Windows Serv er 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. Auto Ru n is unav ailable w ith Macint osh. Quick Inst all Auto Run will star t the inst aller au to- m[...]

  • Página 319

    Install ing the Sof tware 15 2 Important ❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you upgra de the W indows N T 4.0 op erating s y s t e m t o S e r v i c e P a c k 4 o r l a t e r before installing the PCL 6/5e or RPCS ™ printer drivers. Contact your Window s retailer for more in- formation about lat est versions. Note ❒ When th[...]

  • Página 320

    Preparing to Print 16 2 • Windows XP Profess ional and Wind ows S erver 2 003 On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxe s ] . The [ Print- ers and Faxes ] window ap- pears. Ri ght-click the mach ine ic on , and then click [ Rename ] . • Windows XP Home E dition On th e [ Start ] menu , click [ Control Pa nel ] . Clic k [ Printers and Oth[...]

  • Página 321

    Install ing the Sof tware 17 2 • Windows NT 4.0 PCL 6: DRIVERS PCL 6NT4 (Langu age) DISK1 PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5ENT4 (Language)DISK1 RPCS ™ : DRIVERSRPCSN T4 (Language)DISK1 A A A A Quit all applications running. B B B B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive. Auto Run wil l sta rt the in stall er. C C C C Select a langua ge fo[...]

  • Página 322

    Preparing to Print 18 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetB E UI A Click [ NetBEUI ] , and then click [ Se arch ] . A li st of m achin es th at can be used with Net BEUI ap- pears. B Select the machine yo u want to use, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ NetBEU I cannot be used under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. ❒ Machin es th at res pond to a broadcast fr [...]

  • Página 323

    Install ing the Sof tware 19 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ User Code User codes are ei ght digit codes that allow you to keep track of printing done under each code. To use thi s feature, th e network administrator sh ould assign user codes a nd inform users of them before they insta ll the print er driver . Use the follow ing m ethods to enter a user co de fo[...]

  • Página 324

    Preparing to Print 20 2 A Click [ Cancel ] to clo se the [ Port Setti ngs ] dia log b ox. B Start Smar tDeviceMonitor for Clie nt, and th en right- click the SmartDevice- Monitor fo r Client icon on the tas kbar. C Click [ Extended Features Settings ] , and then select the [ Set Recove ry/P arall el Printing fo r each port ] check box. D Click [ OK[...]

  • Página 325

    Install ing the Sof tware 21 2 RPCS ™ prin ter dri ver A A A A On the [ Star t ] menu, point to [ Se t- tings ] , and then click [ Pr inters ] . The [ Prin ter s ] window ap pears. Note ❒ If using Windows XP Profes- sional or Windows Server 2003, click the [ Printers and Faxe s ] win- dow on the [ Star t ] men u. ❒ If using Windows XP H ome E[...]

  • Página 326

    Preparing to Print 22 2 Note ❒ The prin ter driver wi th the se- lec ted la ngu age will b e in - stalled. ❒ The pri nter drive r will be in - stalled in English if you select the following languages: Cesti- na, Magya r, Polski , Portu gues, Suomi, an d Russ ian. D D D D Click [ PostScri pt 3 Print er Driver ] . Add P rinter W izard st arts. E [...]

  • Página 327

    Install ing the Sof tware 23 2 ❒ When prompt ed for the additional driver (alternate driver) location , select t he foll owing fo lders o n the CD-ROM: • Wind ows 95 /98/M e: DRI VERS PSWIN9X _ME(Lang uage) DISK1 • Windows N T 4.0: DRIVERS PSNT4(Language)DISK1 A A A A Quit all applications that are ru n- ning . B B B B Insert the[...]

  • Página 328

    Preparing to Print 24 2 Windows 2000/XP and Wi ndows Server 2003 - Setting up op tions If the machine has optio ns insta lled, you should make se ttings for them using the printe r dri ver. Limitatio n ❒ Cha ngin g the p rin ter se tti ngs re - quires Manage Printe rs permission. Member s of t he Admi nist rator s and Power Users groups have Man-[...]

  • Página 329

    Install ing the Sof tware 25 2 C C C C Select a langua ge for the interface language, an d then click [ OK ] . The following l anguages are avail- able: Cestina ( Czech), Dansk (Dan- ish), Deut sch (Germ an), En glish (English), Espanol (Sp anish), Fran- cais (Fre nch), Ita liano ( Italian), Magy ar (Hu nga rian), Nede rland s (Dutc h), N orsk (No [...]

  • Página 330

    Preparing to Print 26 2 D D D D Click the [ Device Se ttings ] tab. E E E E Select the options you have in- stal led unde r [ Installable Options ] . F F F F Click [ OK ] . - - - - Bidir ecti ona l transm issi on When bidirect ional tra nsmission i s enabled, in forma tion such as pa per size and feed orientation is automati- cally sent to th e com[...]

  • Página 331

    Install ing the Sof tware 27 2 Note ❒ [ SCSI pr int (SBP -2) ] must be set to Active and [ B idirectional SCSI print ] must be set to ON i n [ IEEE 1394 ] on the [ I nterface Settings ] tab in the mach ine's System Set- tings. ❒ In Window s Me, [ E nable bi-di rec- tional su pport for th is printer ] must be s elec ted in [ Spool Settings [...]

  • Página 332

    Preparing to Print 28 2 K K K K Do ub le- cli ck the [ Printer Descrip - tions ] folder in the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder. L L L L Do ub le- cli ck [ Disk 1 ] in the folder of the language you use. M M M M Drag the PPD file into [ Pr int er De - scriptions ] in [ Extens ions ] in [ S ystem Folder ] . N N N N Restart the Macintosh. Setting up the PPD[...]

  • Página 333

    Install ing the Sof tware 29 2 D D D D Do ub le- cli ck the [ Mac O S 8 and 9 ] folder. E E E E Do ub le-c li ck t h e [ ATM ] folder. F F F F Do ub le- cli ck the [ ATM 4.6.2 instal l- er ] icon. G G G G Follow the instructions on screen. H H H H Restart the Macintosh. Note ❒ Make sure to restart the compu- ter. [ ATM ] w ill be com ple tely in-[...]

  • Página 334

    Preparing to Print 30 2 Setting up the PPD file A A A A Run [ Pri nt Ce nte r ] . B B B B Click [ Add Pr inter ] . Note ❒ Sele ct [ App leTalk ] in the first pop-u p m enu . ❒ If the zone has been set, select the zone in the seco nd pop-up menu. C C C C Select the PPD fil e for the model you are using from the [ Print er Model: ] pop-up m enu. [...]

  • Página 335

    Install ing the Sof tware 31 2 D D D D Insert the CD-ROM p rovided into the CD-ROM drive. Note ❒ When Auto Run st arts, cl ick [ Ex- it ] . ❒ If you want to d isable Auto Run, press { { { { Shi ft } } } } whe n in ser t- ing th e C D-RO M in to t he dr ive and keep it pressed until th e computer completes transmis- sion to the d rive. E E E E S[...]

  • Página 336

    Preparing to Print 32 2 A A A A Install the printer driver by refer- ring to the instruct ions for instal- lation. Note ❒ Each prin ter driv er is stor ed in the following folders on the CD- ROM: • PCL 6: DRIVE RSPCL6 WIN2K_XP(Language) DISK1 • PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5E WIN2K_XP(Language) DISK1 • RPCS ™ : DRIVERSRPCS WIN2K_XP(Lan[...]

  • Página 337

    Install ing the Sof tware 33 2 ❒ SCSI print must be enabled using the control pa nel. See "Interface Settings/IEEE 1394", Netwo rk Guide . ❒ SCSI prin t using the op tiona l IEEE 1394 in terface bo ard is not sup- ported by Windows 95/9 8/Me, or Win dows NT 4 .0. If the “ plug an d play ” f unction start s, click [ Cancel ] in the[...]

  • Página 338

    Preparing to Print 34 2 G G G G Sel ect th e pr int er d riv er yo u w an t to install. Eac h printer driver is stored in the following folders : • PCL 6: DRIVERSPCL6 WIN2K_X P(Language) DISK1 • PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5 E WIN2K_X P(Language) DISK1 • RPCS ™ : DRIVERSRPCS WIN2K_X P(Language) DISK1 • PostScr ipt 3: DRIVERSPS WIN[...]

  • Página 339

    Install ing the Sof tware 35 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ If you do not want to i nstall the printer when [ Found New Ha rdware Wizard ] starts when us ing an opera ting sys- tem that supports SCSI print, disable the device with the following proce- dure: • Windows 2000 A In the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] d i a l o g b o x , c l i c k [ Next ] . B When ?[...]

  • Página 340

    Preparing to Print 36 2 Instal ling SmartDev iceMo nitor for Clie nt/Admin Limitatio n ❒ If your o perating system i s Win- dows 2000/X P, Wind ows Server 2003, or Wind ows NT 4 .0, i nst all- ing software using Auto Run re- quir es A dmi nist rato r pe rm issi on. When you in stall a print er dri ver using Auto Run, log on usi ng an account that[...]

  • Página 341

    Install ing the Sof tware 37 2 D D D D Click [ Font Manager 2000 ] . E E E E Follow the instructions on the screen. Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6. 0, 6.5, or 7.0 If you use the machine under Win- dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/X P, Windows Serv er 2003, or Window s NT 4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to cop y the PPD file to the Page- Make r fo ld[...]

  • Página 342

    Preparing to Print 38 2 Software and Utilit ies Included on the CD- ROM There ar e two CD- ROMs t hat come with the printer opt ion of this ma - chine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ The Printer/Scann er Unit Type 2018 package c ontains the f ollowing CD- ROMs: • Printe r Drivers and Util ities • Operating Instructions for Printer/Scanner The C D-R OM la bel [...]

  • Página 343

    Softwar e and Utiliti es Included on t he CD-ROM 39 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ PCL printer dri vers Two kin ds of PCL prin ter d river s: PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are i ncluded on the CD- ROM that c omes w ith thi s machine . These drive rs allow the computer to communicat e with the machin e via a printer lan- guage. We recom mend PCL 6 as your f irst choi ce. No[...]

  • Página 344

    Preparing to Print 40 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ USB Print ing S upport This ut ility is fo r the USB 2.0 in ter- face. Install this to use USB on compute rs r unnin g Windo ws 98 SE/Me. For information a bout in- stalla tion, see p.30 “ Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ” . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Acrobat Reader This ut ility a llows you t o read P DF fi[...]

  • Página 345

    41 INDEX 1394 Util ity , 39 A Acrobat R eader , 40 ATM Macintosh, installing , 28 B Bidire ctional tran smission , 26 Bypass tray , 7 C CD-ROM , 38 Connection Eth ernet board c onnec ti on , 5 IEEE 1394 interface board connection , 5 Parallel inte rface conn ection , 5 USB con nection , 5 Control P anel , 3 Control p anel , 4 Custom si ze pape r , [...]

  • Página 346

    42 S Screen fonts Macintosh, installing , 29 SCSI p rint , 32 Sma rtDev iceMo n ito r for Admi n , 36 , 39 Sma rtDev iceMo nit or fo r Cli ent , 36 , 39 Software Quick Install , 14 T Thick Pa per printi ng, bypas s tray , 11 U USB connection printer dr iver, instal ling , 30 USB P rinting Suppo rt , 40 W Windows 2000/XP an d Windows Server 2003 PCL[...]

  • Página 347

    43 MEMO KirC2- GB-Pref 1-F_FM. book Page 43 Mo nday, Septe mber 8, 2003 2: 43 PM[...]

  • Página 348

    44 GB GB B622-85 00 MEMO KirC2- GB-Pref 1-F_FM. book Page 44 Mo nday, Septe mber 8, 2003 2: 43 PM[...]

  • Página 349

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Declar ation o f Conformi ty “The Pro duct complie s with the require ments of the EMC Directi ve 89/33 6/EEC and its amending di - rectiv es and the Low Vo ltage Dir ect[...]

  • Página 350

    Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thic kness=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Printer/Scanner Un it Type 2018 Operating Instructio ns Printer Reference 1 Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Operat ing In structio ns Printer Reference 1 For s afe and co rr[...]

  • Página 351

    Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it. Sett ing Up the P rint er Dri ver an d Cance ling a Pr int Jo b Troubl eshoo ting Prin ter F eature s Append ix[...]

  • Página 352

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. Important Conte[...]

  • Página 353

    i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the re levant parts o f the manual . Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are pr ovided: • CD-ROM 1“Op[...]

  • Página 354

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, an d the operatin g environment for De skTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail. This gu[...]

  • Página 355

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ......... ...... ....... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ...... 1 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Print er Pr[...]

  • Página 356

    iv[...]

  • Página 357

    1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury. R CAUTION: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not follo[...]

  • Página 358

    2 Names of Major Opt ions Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual: • IEEE 1394 In terface Board Type B → IEEE 1394 in terface board • IEEE 802.11b Interfac e Unit Type D → IEEE 802.1 1b interface unit • IEEE 1284 In terface Board Type A → IEEE 1284 in terface board • PostScript3 Unit Type 201 8 → Post[...]

  • Página 359

    3 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing Pri nter Propert ies Changing default settings A A A A On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Set- tings ] , and then click [ Pr int ers ] . The [ Pr inters ] window appears . B B B B Click the ico n of the machine whose def ault you [...]

  • Página 360

    Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 4 1 Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Pri nter Propert ies Changing default settings - Printer properties Limita tion ❒ Changing machine set tings re- quires Manage Printers per mis- sion. Member s of Administra tors and Power Users gr oups hav e Manage Printers pe rmission[...]

  • Página 361

    Accessing Printer Properties 5 1 C C C C On the [ File ] menu , click [ Pr int ing Prefer ences... ] . The [ Printing Prefer ences ] di al og box appears. D D D D Make the settings you requ ire, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ Settings you make her e are used as default for all applic ations. Making se ttings from a n application To make settings [...]

  • Página 362

    Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 Changing the default set tings - Default document propertie s Limita tion ❒ Changing machine settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Opera tors, P rint Operator s, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set[...]

  • Página 363

    Accessing Printer Properties 7 1 Macintosh - Setting Up for Printi ng Making paper s ettings from a n application A A A A Open the file you w ant to print. B B B B On the [ File ] menu, click [ Page Set - up ] . The [ AdobePS Page Setup ] dialog box appears. C C C C Make sure the machine you want to use is shown in the [ Pri nter : ] box. Note ❒ [...]

  • Página 364

    Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows - Can celing a Prin t Job A A A A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar. A window appears, showing all print jobs cu rrently queued for printing. Check the current status of th e job you wan t to ca ncel. B B B B Select the name of the job you w[...]

  • Página 365

    Canceling a Print Job 9 1 Macintosh - Cancel ing a Print Job Mac OS A A A A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop. A window appears, showing all print jobs cu rrently queued for printing. Check the current status of th e job you wan t to ca ncel. B B B B Select the name of the job you want to canc el. C C C C Click the pause icon, and then c[...]

  • Página 366

    Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 F F F F Press [ JobRes et ] . G G G G Press [ Curre nt ] . • [ Current ] : cancel s the print job currently being process ed. • [ Resume ] : resumes printing jobs. A confirmation message appears. H H H H Press [ Yes ] to cancel the print job. Note ❒ Press [ No ] to return to the pre[...]

  • Página 367

    11 2. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Display This section descr ibes the princi pal mess ages that app ear on the displ ay. If a message not described here a ppears, act acc ording to the message. Reference Before turning the main power off, see ‘ Tur ning On th e Po wer ’ , Copy Refer- ence . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Status m essage[...]

  • Página 368

    Troubleshooting 12 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Alert me ssages Messages/Second m essages Causes Solutions Add ton er Out of toner. Follow instructions inside and replace toner Toner is running out. It is time to supply toner. Change Tray # to the fo llow- ing settings: xxx yyy The settin gs of th e sele cte d pa- per tray a re different fr om those specified[...]

  • Página 369

    Error & Status Messages on the Display 13 2 Dupl ex mode is in off posi - tion for Tr ay # The selec ted paper t ray has not been configured for du- plex pri nting. # in dic ate s th e tr ay numb er . Pre ss [ JobReset ] to change the paper tr ay set tings or do s in- gle-sided printing. For details a bout the tray set - ting s, se e General Se[...]

  • Página 370

    Troubleshooting 14 2 Print overrun. The image data has been thinned out due to image com- pressio n. Increase memory capacity. When installing a memory module in the machine, con- tact y our sales o r serv ice re p- resentative. Probl em:I EEE1394 board An error ma y hav e occu rred i n the IEEE 1394 boar d. Turn off the ma in power switc h, and b [...]

  • Página 371

    The Machine Does Not Print 15 2 The Machine Do es Not Print Possible Ca use Solutions Is the power on? Check the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and the machine. Turn on the main power switch. Is the machine online? If not, press { { { { f f f f Online } } } } on the control panel. Does the printer function status i ndic ator stay r[...]

  • Página 372

    Troubleshooting 16 2 When using wireless LAN, is the LED on the wireless LAN card lit or blinking? Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the green LED is lit or blinks during transm ission. Is the wireless LAN being used in ad hoc mode? Turn the main pow er off and back on. See “ Turn ing On th e Pow- er ” , Copy Reference . Otherwise, configure [[...]

  • Página 373

    The Machine Does Not Print 17 2 Problem Soluti ons Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p rin t jo b? If not, data is not being sent t o the machine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine is c onnected to the comput er using the interf ace cable Check the machine port set tings are correct. For parallel p ort connection, port LP T[...]

  • Página 374

    Troubleshooting 18 2 Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p rin t jo b? ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Network connection Contact your network adminis trator. Problem Soluti ons[...]

  • Página 375

    Other Printing Problems 19 2 Other Printing Problems Problem Causes and Sol utions The print on the entire pa ge is fad- ed. If [ T oner Sav ing ] is selected on the [ Print Qualit y ] tab in the pr inter driver, the entire page will be faded when printed. Note ❒ In PostScript 3, click [ Advanced... ] on the [ Paper/Quality ] tab , an d th en se-[...]

  • Página 376

    Troubleshooting 20 2 When using Win- dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/ XP, or Win - dows NT 4 .0, ei- ther combined printing or book- let print does not come out as ex - pecte d. Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match thos e of the printer driver. If a d ifferent pap er size and orie nta tion ar e se t, sel ect t he s[...]

  • Página 377

    Other Printing Problems 21 2 It tak es a l ong time to com pl ete a print jo b. Photographs and other data intens ive pages ta ke a long time for the ma- chine to process, so simp ly wait when printing such data. Changing the following settings with the print er driver may help speed up printing : • PCL 6/5e Select the lowest value for [ Resoluti[...]

  • Página 378

    Troubleshooting 22 2 Note ❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contac t your sales or servi ce representative. It takes too much time to res ume printing . The da ta i s s o la rg e or c omp le x tha t i t ta kes t im e to pro ces s. I f th e Data In indicator is blinking, data is being processed. S imply wait until printing resume s. The machine w[...]

  • Página 379

    23 3. Printer Features Reference For more information about copier features and system settings, s ee Copy Ref- erence and Gener al Settings Guide . Printer Features Menu There are seven menu i tems in the Printer Features menu: • Paper Inpu t • List/T est Pri nt • Mainte nance • Sys tem • Host Int erfac e • PCL Menu • PS Menu (opt io[...]

  • Página 380

    Printer Features 24 3 *1 App ears w hen th e Post Script 3 un it (opt iona l) is insta lled. *2 Appears on Type 3 machine only. Check you r machine type . System See p.31 “ Sys tem ” . Print Error Report Auto C ontin ue Memory Overflow Memory Usa ge Duplex *2 Copies Edge Smoothing Toner Saving Pri nter L angu ag e *1 Sub P aper Size Page Size L[...]

  • Página 381

    Adjusting Printer Features 25 3 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features allows basic adjustment of operations when using the mac hine as a printe r. Although fact ory default settings are suitable for most printing jobs, Printer Fea- tures gives you acc ess to a number of settin gs that control basic printer opera- tions. Printer Features setti[...]

  • Página 382

    Printer Features 26 3 Printer Features Parameters Paper In put ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass Paper Size The size of the paper set in the by- pass tray. Reference For more information about pa- per sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see General Settings Gui de . For information about setting paper in the byp ass tray, see Printer Refer ence 1 . Note[...]

  • Página 383

    Printer Features P arameters 27 3 D D D D Select [ Config. Page ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. The configuration page is printed. Interpreting the c onfiguration page System R eferen ce ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Un it N umb er Displays the serial numbe r assigned to the boar d by its manuf[...]

  • Página 384

    Printer Features 28 3 Paper Input Displays the settings made und er the Paper Input m enu. Reference p.26 “ Paper In put ” System Displays the settings mad e under the System men u. Reference p.31 “ Sys tem ” PCL Menu Displays the settings made und er PCL Menu. Reference p.34 “ PCL Menu ” PS Menu Displays the settings made und er PS Men[...]

  • Página 385

    Printer Features P arameters 29 3 Maintenanc e ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Menu Protect This pro ced ure le ts you pr otect menu setting s from acci dental change. It makes it impossi ble to change menu setting s with normal procedures un less you perform the required key operations. In a net- work enviro nment, only adminis - trat ors ca n make chang es to me[...]

  • Página 386

    Printer Features 30 3 Canceling Menu Protec t A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Printer Fea tures ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Select [ Maintenance ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { [...]

  • Página 387

    Printer Features P arameters 31 3 System ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print Error Report Select this to have an error re port printed when a printer or memory error occurs. • On • Off Note ❒ Def au lt : Of f ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Continue You can select this to enab le Auto Con tinue. W hen it is On , print ing continues a fter a sys tem error oc- curs. ?[...]

  • Página 388

    Printer Features 32 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer Language Normally, the machine should b e set to Au to. If the printer language cannot be detected in Auto, the langu age specifie d by Default Printer Lang. is selected. • Auto • PCL • PS Note ❒ Def au lt : Auto ❒ [ Printer Language ] appears if the optiona l PostScrip t 3 unit is in- stalled[...]

  • Página 389

    Printer Features P arameters 33 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Edge-Edge Print Select this to maximize the printa- ble area by minim izing the white space along the edges, to approxi- mately 0.04 inches (1 mm). • Off • On Note ❒ Def au lt : Of f ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Default P rinter Lang. You can set the default p rinter lan- guage i f the mac hin e cannot fin[...]

  • Página 390

    Printer Features 34 3 PCL Menu ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orientati on You can set t he page orientat ion. • Po rt rait • Landscape Note ❒ Def au lt : Po rtrait ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Form Lines You can set th e numbe r of lines per page. • 5 to 128 by 1 Note ❒ Def au lt : • Metric version: 64 • Inch version : 60 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Font Source You can set[...]

  • Página 391

    Printer Features P arameters 35 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Ext. A4 Widt h You can exten d th e prin ting ar ea width (when p rinting on A4 s heet with PCL). • Off • On Note ❒ Def au lt : Of f ❒ When th e setting is O n, the width will be 8 / inc hes. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Append CR to LF By connecting to a host operating sy stem suc h as UN IX a nd s ett [...]

  • Página 392

    Printer Features 36 3[...]

  • Página 393

    37 4. Appendix User Defined Pages Using this functi on, you can s pecify the pa ge numbers for each input tray. Reference For printing methods, see the printer driver He lp. Limita tion ❒ This function is available with the PCL printer driver only. ❒ If [ User Defined Pa ges ] in [ Pape r Selection: ] is selec ted on the [ Pap er ] ta b, [ Layo[...]

  • Página 394

    Appendix 38 4 System Settings (Parallel Connection) Interface Settings/Paral lel Interface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Parallel Tim ing Specifies the timing for the para llel interface. Norma lly, you do not need to chan ge this setting . • ACK ins ide • ACK ou tsid e • STB d own Note ❒ Def au lt : ACK outside ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Parallel Comm. Speed Speci[...]

  • Página 395

    Specifications 39 4 Specifications This se ction co ntains t he machin e's ele ctrical and hardwar e spec ificatio ns, in- cluding information about its options. *1 To use NetBE UI, use the SmartDeviceMonit or port. Component Specific ations Reso lutio n PCL 6 : 600 dp i PCL 5e: 300 dp i, 60 0 dpi RPCS ™ : 300 dpi , 600 dp i PostSc ript 3 : [...]

  • Página 396

    Appendix 40 4 Options Limita tion ❒ Only one optional interface can be ins talled in the machine at a time. There- fore, the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, the optional IEEE 802.11b inter- face unit (wireless LAN board), the optional IEEE 1284 interface board and the optional Blue tooth interface unit c annot be installed co ncurrently. IEEE[...]

  • Página 397

    Specifications 41 4 IEEE 802. 11b Interfac e Unit Type D ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Transm ission sp ec.: Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless L AN) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol: TCP/ IP, NetBEU I, IPX/SP X, Apple Talk Note ❒ SmartDeviceMonitor an d Web browser are supported . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Data tran sfer speed: Auto select from below speed 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, [...]

  • Página 398

    Appendix 42 4 BlueTooth Unit Type 2238 This Bluetooth interface unit supports BIP if t he optional PostScript 3 unit is in- stalled. Reference See the manua l that comes w ith option al Bluetooth interface un it.[...]

  • Página 399

    43 INDEX B BlueTooth Unit Type 2238 , 42 C Canc eling a job Macin tosh , 9 Windo ws , 8 Config uration pag e , 26 Cont rol pane l print er feature s, adj usting , 23 D Data In indicato r , 17 , 21 , 22 Displ ay error messa ges , 11 E Error messages , 11 F Fonts , 39 H Host Int erfa ce , 33 I IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A , 41 IEEE 1394 Interface[...]

  • Página 400

    44 GB GB B622-8518 W Win dows canceling a job , 8 Windows 2000/ XP and Windows Se rver 200 3 prin ter prop erti es, prin ter driv er , 4 Window s 95/98/Me prin ter prop erti es, prin ter driv er , 3 Win dows NT 4.0 prin ter prop erti es, prin ter driv er , 5[...]

  • Página 401

    Copyri ght © 2003[...]

  • Página 402

    Printer/Scanner Unit Type 2018 Op erating Instructions Printer Reference 2 GB GB B622-8518[...]

  • Página 403

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =80 // Print s cale=81 % Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thickness / 2 = 0 mm FAX Option Type 201 8 Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> FAX Op tion T ype 2 018 Operat ing In structio ns Facsimile Reference &[...]

  • Página 404

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =80 // Print s cale=81 % Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Intr oduc tio n This man ual des cribes d etaile d instr ucti ons on the ope ration and no tes about the u se of this machine. To get max imum vers atilit y fr[...]

  • Página 405

    i NOTICE NOTICE TO USERS (NEW ZEALAND) A The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equ ipment indicates only tha t Telec om has accep ted that the ite m comp lies with mi nimu m cond iti ons for connec tion to its network . It indicate s no end orsement of the produ ct by Teleco m, nor do es it p rovide any sort of warran ty. Abo ve all, i[...]

  • Página 406

    ii Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the op erational procedures o f this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specif ic to machin e type. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view the man uals as a PDF file. ❒ Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1 ?[...]

  • Página 407

    iii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Bin der V 2 L ite is a util ity i ncl uded on t he C D-R OM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Do cume nt M ana ge ment Util itie s ” . • DeskTopBin der V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in[...]

  • Página 408

    iv TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE .. ........ ..... ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ .... i Manuals for This Machin e ......... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ..... ii How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ..... ........ ...... ....[...]

  • Página 409

    v Entering an E-ma il Address .............. ...... ........... ...... .......... ....... ....... .......... ...... ........ 31 Using the Destina tion List .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... ....... .......... .... 31 Specifying a destination using th e Quick Dial ke y ............... ...... .......... ......[...]

  • Página 410

    vi Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page vi Mo nday, September 29, 2 003 1 1:36 AM[...]

  • Página 411

    1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manual, the followi ng symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious i njury when you misuse th e machine without fol lowing the in- structi ons under t his symbo l. Be su re to rea d the inst ruction s, all of which a re in- c[...]

  • Página 412

    2 Names of Major Option Major op tions o f thi s mach ine are referre d to a s foll ows in t his m anual: • Auto Docume nt Feeder → ADF • Auto Docume nt Feeder ca pable of scanning both si de of a sheet → ARDF Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page 2 Mond ay, Sep tembe r 29, 200 3 11:3 6 AM[...]

  • Página 413

    3 1. Getting Started Control Panel The illustrati on shows the contr ol panel when option s are installed. 1. Communicating indicator Lights during tran smission or reception. 2. Receive File indicator Lights to t ell you a messa ge has been re- ce ived into mem ory . Bli nks w he n a Memory Lock file has been received. See p.79 “ Memory L ock ?[...]

  • Página 414

    Getting Sta rted 4 1 11. { { { { On Hook Dial } } } } key Use to dial a number whi le hearing to ne. 12. { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key Use to chang e default or operation pa- rameters accord ing to the operating con- dit ion s. 13. { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key Press to clear the current setti ng. 14. { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key Clea[...]

  • Página 415

    Control Panel 5 1 30. Numbe r k eys Use to enter numeric values. 31. { { { { Start } } } } key Press to begin faxing, printing repo rts or lists. Reading t he Disp lay The display shows you th e machine status, messages, and guides you through oper atio ns. Note ❒ This machine autom aticall y retur ns to s tandb y mode if you do not use th e mach[...]

  • Página 416

    Getting Sta rted 6 1 1. Machine stat us or currentl y se- lected function 2. Message 3. Destinati on entry 4. Selection keys 5. Selectable items ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When Internet Fax Settings is ON 1. Switches the destination be- tween fax number and e-mai l ad- dres s. Note ❒ To us e the Intern et Fax fu nctions, the optional pr inter/s canner unit [...]

  • Página 417

    Control Panel 7 1 Com muni cat ion di splay While co mmun icating, the m achine status is displaye d. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Transmission (fax transmission) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Immediate Transmission ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ TX Mode When a funct ion is set to on, a “ clip ” mar k is a ttached to th at fu nction na me. Note ❒ To s[...]

  • Página 418

    Getting Sta rted 8 1 User code entry display When the following message a ppears on the disp lay, User Code Management is active . Enter a user code to deacti vate Use r Code Managem ent. The mach ine can be set up so that no one can use it without e ntering a u ser code. This preve nts unautho rized people from sending fax messa ges and helps tr a[...]

  • Página 419

    9 2. Faxing Transmiss ion Modes There are two types of transmission: • Memory Transmission • Immediate Transmission Note ❒ You can use Pa rallel Memory Transmis sion that dials while t he orig inal is be ing sc an ned. Se e p.3 1 “ Parall el Mem ory Tr ansm issi on ” , Facsimile Reference <Advanced Fea - tures> . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mem[...]

  • Página 420

    Faxing 10 2 Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmissi on Check the indicators on the operation panel to check which m ode is cur rent- ly active and press t he { { { { Transmission Mode } } } } key to t oggle between t hem. Note ❒ You can select t he transmission mode (M emo ry Tran smi ssi on o r Immediate Transmission) that[...]

  • Página 421

    Placin g Originals 11 2 Placing Or iginals You can place the origin als either in the op tio nal ADF o r ARD F or on th e exposure gl ass. Some typ es of ori gi- nals a re unsuitab le for the ADF or ARD F , s o th ey m us t b e pl ac ed o n t he exposure glass. Place to sca n by portra it or ientati on for the original of A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11&q[...]

  • Página 422

    Faxing 12 2 ❒ When sending a fax, the image out- put at the other end depends on the size and orientation of paper used in the receiver 's terminal. If the recei ver does n ot us e paper of the same s ize and orientation a s that of the origi- nal, the fax ima ge may be reduce d in size, trim med a t both edges , or d i- vided into two or mo[...]

  • Página 423

    Placin g Originals 13 2 Placing Ori ginals in the Optional ADF or ARDF Use th e ADF or ARDF to scan in a stack of originals in one operation. The ARDF can handle both one-sided and two- sided orig ina ls. Limitatio n ❒ Place a ll the original s to be se nt in a single st ack. You cannot place origin als in th e ADF or A RDF one page at a time or [...]

  • Página 424

    Faxing 14 2 • Curled, folded , or cr eased origi- nals • Pas ted orig ina ls • Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermosensiti ve paper, ar t paper, aluminum foil, carbon pa- per, or conducti ve pap er • Origina ls wi th index ta bs, tags , or other pro jecting parts • Sticky originals, such as tra nslu- cent paper • Thin and [...]

  • Página 425

    Placin g Originals 15 2 Original sizes d ifficult to detec t The machine find s it difficult to detect the size of the followi ng kinds of origi- nals. If this happ ens, the receiving mac hine may not select print paper of the cor - rect size. • Documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other than those li sted in the table below • Origin[...]

  • Página 426

    Faxing 16 2 Memory Tr ansmissio n In Memory Transmission mode, af ter you press the { { { { Start } } } } key, the machine does no t dial th e de stin atio n u ntil all pages of your fax message have been scanned into memory (in contrast to Immed iat e Tra nsmi ssi on, where t he num ber is diale d first an d page s are scanned and sent one by one)[...]

  • Página 427

    Memory Trans mission 17 2 A A A A Make s ure that Me mory T rans. indicator lights. Note ❒ If it is not, press th e { { { { Tran smis- sion Mode } } } } key. B B B B Place the ori ginal in the ADF or ARDF, or on the exposure glas s. Note ❒ You can send the first few pages from the exposure glass then the remaining pages from the ADF or ARDF. Af[...]

  • Página 428

    Faxing 18 2 F F F F Specify a destination . Note ❒ Press [] to switc h the des- tina tion be twe en fax nu mber and e-mail ad dress. ❒ If you want to specify another dest ina tion, repe at ste ps E an d F . ❒ Entere d desti natio ns can be checked u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . ❒ To delete a n entered destina- tion,[...]

  • Página 429

    Cancelin g a Memory Transmis sion 19 2 Canceling a Me mory Transmissi on Even when fa x nu mber and e-m ail address are simultaneously speci fied, or on ly e- ma il add re ss is s pec ifie d, you can cancel the mode u sing th e s a m e p r o c e d u r e . H o w e v e r , y o u c a n - not cancel the transmission of a sent Internet Fax document. Bef[...]

  • Página 430

    Faxing 20 2 C C C C Pre ss [ St op TX ] . D D D D Pre ss [ Dele te ] . The standby display appears. Note ❒ If you want to c ancel stop ping, press [ No ] . Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page 20 Mon day, S eptem ber 29, 2003 11 :36 AM[...]

  • Página 431

    Immediate Tr ansmission 21 2 Immediate Trans mission With Imme diate Transmission, when you press the { { { { Start } } } } key, th e fax number is dialed immediately. The message is scanned and transmitted page by page without bein g stored in memor y. Th is co nt rast s wi th Me mor y Transmissio n which scans all pages into memory before dial in[...]

  • Página 432

    Faxing 22 2 Referen ce p.11 “ Placing Originals ” . C C C C Select t he sca n settin gs you re- quir e. Referen ce p.25 “ Scan Settings ” p.26 “ Original Type ” p.27 “ Image D ensity ( Con- trast) ” D D D D Specify a destination . Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, and then enter the correct n[...]

  • Página 433

    Immediate Tr ansmission 23 2 - - - - Sendi ng orig inal s u sing t he exposure gla ss A Make sure that Immediate Trans. indicator lights. If it is not, press the { { { { Transmissio n Mode } } } } key. B Place the first page face dow n on the exposure gl ass. C Spe cify a d es tin atio n. D Make the scan settings you r e- quire. E Press the { { { {[...]

  • Página 434

    Faxing 24 2 Canceling an Imme diate Tr ansmission Before Yo u Have P ressed { { { { Start } } } } Key A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key. Note ❒ When the or iginal is placed in the ADF or ARDF, you can also cancel an Imme diate Transmis- sion by re moving the or igi nal. After You Have Pressed { { { { Start } } } } Key A A A A Pr[...]

  • Página 435

    Scan Sett ings 25 2 Scan Settings You may wa nt to send many different types of fax messages. Som e of these may be diffic ult to reprod uce at the receiver's end. However, your ma- chine has three set tings th at you can adjust to help you tran smit your doc- ument with the best po ssible image quality . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Resolution: Standard ,[...]

  • Página 436

    Faxing 26 2 A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Reso lu tion } } } } key to swit ch bet wee n reso lut ions. The indicators ab ove the key shows the current selection. Original Type If your origi nal contains phot o- graphs, illustrations, or diagrams with complex shading pa tterns or grays, select the appropriate original type to optimize image clarity. ?[...]

  • Página 437

    Scan Sett ings 27 2 Image Density (Contrast) The t ext a nd diagr ams in your orig i- nal sh ould sta nd out clea rly from the paper they are written on. I f your original has a darker background than normal (for example, a new spa- per cli pping) , or i f the wr iting is fain t, adjust the image density. Use the { { { { Image Densi ty } } } } key [...]

  • Página 438

    Faxing 28 2 When placing origi nals in the optional ADF or ARDF Note ❒ Depending on what time the scan settings are adjust ed, the settings may no t be r eflected in the res ult- ing operation. A A A A Check w hich p ages you wa nt to scan with d ifferent settings. B B B B Select the image den sity, resolu- tion, and original type before the next[...]

  • Página 439

    Specifying a Des tination 29 2 Specifying a De stinati on Yo u can sp ecif y the de stin ati on us ing one of three method s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax number p.29 “ Entering a Fax Number ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail address p.31 “ E ntering an E-m ail Address ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destination list p.31 “ Using the Destination List ” Th is s ect ion [...]

  • Página 440

    Faxing 30 2 Paus e Press the { { { { Pause/Redia l } } } } key when di- aling or storing a number to insert a paus e of abo ut two seconds . Note ❒ You cannot i nsert a p ause befor e the first digit of a fax number. If you pr ess the { { { { Pause/ Redial } } } } key at the first digit, a redial occurs. See p.2 6 “ Redial ” , Facsimile Refer[...]

  • Página 441

    Specifying a Des tination 31 2 Entering an E-mail Address When using In tern et Fax transmis- sion, specify the e-mail address in place of the fax number. Note ❒ You can enter up to 128 c haracters. A A A A Make sure that is displayed in the destination d isplay column. Note ❒ If it is not d ispla yed, pres s [] . B B B B Pre ss [ Manua l ] . C[...]

  • Página 442

    Faxing 32 2 Limitatio n ❒ Group Dial can be used for Memo- ry Transmission only; not Immedi- ate Tr ansmi ssio n. If y ou specif y Immediate Transm ission in Gro up Dial, t he " Try again after switchi ng to m emory trans- missio n. " message ap pears. When this happens, press [ Ex it ] , and th en sw itch to Me mory T rans- mission. No[...]

  • Página 443

    Specifying a Des tination 33 2 Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and tr y again. ❒ If you wan t to specify o ther des- tinations, press [ Add Dest ] . C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ If you press an incorrect Quick Dial key , press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, and th en press [...]

  • Página 444

    Faxing 34 2 Searching for a De stinati on Use t his proc edure t o search thro ugh the destinat ion lists for a particular destinat ion. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Search by Destination Name p.34 “ Search b y Destinat ion Name ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Select by Display Destination List p.35 “ S electing from De stination List ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Specifying a R[...]

  • Página 445

    Searching f or a Destination 35 2 F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. A search progres s starts, then search re sult app ears. Note ❒ If no dest ination is m atched for specified text, " Specified destinat ion is not pr o- grammed. " is disp layed. Press [ Exit ] to retur n to the display of B . G G G G Select the desti nation n[...]

  • Página 446

    Faxing 36 2 E E E E Select the destin ation you want to specify using { { { {T T T T} } } } or { { { {U U U U} } } } . F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The speci fied d estinatio n is sele ct- ed. Note ❒ Press [ Add Dest ] to specify other destinations . ❒ You ca nnot sp ecif y desti nati ons twice. If you try to, the “ This destin[...]

  • Página 447

    Searching f or a Destination 37 2 F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The destination which you searched is specified for the d esti- nation. Note ❒ If you try to specify the destina- tion again, " Th is d estina tion has already be en pro- grammed. " is disp layed. Press [ Exit ] to ret urn to the de stinat ion specifying displ[...]

  • Página 448

    Faxing 38 2 G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Search result appe ars. Note ❒ If no dest ination is m atched for specified fax number, " Spec i- fied destin ation i s not program med. " is displayed. Press [ Ex it ] to re turn to step C . H H H H Select the number to specify us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } [...]

  • Página 449

    Searching f or a Destination 39 2 E E E E Enter an e-mail addres s to search for. Referen ce "Entering Text", General Settin gs Guide Note ❒ You can search wit h a part of the e-mai l address . However, you must enter a num ber fro m top for begin ning matching. ❒ If you enter a wrong e-mail ad- dres s, pres s { { { {W W W W} } } } , [...]

  • Página 450

    Faxing 40 2 Recepti on There are two ways you can set up your mach ine to ha ndle in coming calls: • Manual Reception (external tele- phone req uired) • Auto R ecept ion ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manual Reception When a telephone c all comes in, the machine rings. If the call is a fax message, you must switch manual- ly to facs imile mode . ❖ ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 451

    41 3. Using Internet Fax Functions Internet Fax Functions The optional printer/sca nner unit is required. This machine co nve rts scann ed docu ment im ages to e-mail forma t and tran smi ts the da ta over the I nternet. The e-mail se nt by this machine can be r eceived by another Internet F ax ma- chine. I nstead o f dialing t he telephon e num be[...]

  • Página 452

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 42 3 Interne t Fax Precautions • Internet F ax comm unicates with a ser ver over a LAN. It c annot co mmunicate direc tly wi th ot her part ies. • If a transmission is not successfu l, this machine usually receives a n e-mail er- ror notification. See p.103 “ Server-G enerat ed Err or E-m ail ” , Facsimile Ref[...]

  • Página 453

    Internet Fax Functio ns 43 3 T.37 Full Mode This machine is T.37 full mode compatib le. T.37 full mode is an international standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T announcement, RFC2532) When an I ntern et Fax c ommun icati on is mad e betw een T.37 full mo de com pat- ible mach ines, t he recei ver s ide sends the re turn rec eipt ( dispatc [...]

  • Página 454

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 44 3 Note ❒ If the receiver is progr ammed as the simple mode mac hine or not pro- grammed in the Add ress Book , the r eceiv er's rec eption capabili ty can not be registered. ❒ If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually. How- ever, this setting will be o verwritten w hen t[...]

  • Página 455

    Tran smitti ng In terne t Fax 45 3 Transmitting Internet Fax Prep arat ion You need to make System Settings beforeha nd. See “ Setting Up the Machine on a N etwork ” , Networ k Guide . This section d escr ibes ho w to scan a docum ent into the me mory and send it as e-mail. Specify the destination's e-mail address instead of fax number. Yo[...]

  • Página 456

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 46 3 ❒ You can l imit the si ze of tr ansmit - ted e-mail messages. See p.73 “ E- mail Setti ngs ” , Fa csimi le Ref erence <Advanced Feat ures> . ❒ See p.54 “ Received Im ages ” for how e -m ail is act ual ly r ece ived by the com puter when it is sent with mail op tions selected . ❒ When you tran[...]

  • Página 457

    Tran smitti ng In terne t Fax 47 3 D Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The di splay return s to that of step A . Note ❒ If you press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, entering a subject is ca n- celed. Th e displa y retur ns to that of s tep A . To enter the programmed subject A Select [ Attach S ubject ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {[...]

  • Página 458

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 48 3 ❒ Note that you cannot place p ag- es on the exposure glass after you have started using the ADF or ARDF . ❒ The ori ginal can be placed ei- ther in the ADF or AR DF or on the expos ure gl ass, unti l the { { { { Sta rt } } } } key is pressed. Referen ce p.11 “ Placing Originals ” . F F F F Select t he sc[...]

  • Página 459

    Tran smitti ng In terne t Fax 49 3 J J J J Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. This machin e starts scanning the document i nto memory . The e- mail send operatio n starts after the scanning operation is complete. When scanning is complete, the Communicating indicator lights and transmiss ion starts. Note ❒ With a large vo lume of d ocu- ment,[...]

  • Página 460

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 50 3 Confirming Rec eption When Return Rec eipt is set under “ E- mail Option s ” , the receiver sends back a return rece ipt me ssage . Onc e the return receipt messag e has been received, "OK" appears in the Result column of Jo urnal, allowin g the or igi- nator to verify that the transmission has been[...]

  • Página 461

    Canceli ng Interne t Fax Transmis sion 51 3 Canceling Inte rnet Fax Tra nsmissio n When fax and Inte rnet Fax d estina- tions are specified s imultaneously, you can c ancel sending using the same me th od. Note ❒ You cannot cancel a transmission once scanni ng is comp lete. Befor e the Origin al Is Scanned Use this procedu re to cance l a trans- [...]

  • Página 462

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 52 3 Receiv ing Internet Fax You ca n rece ive e-mai l docume nts by Inte rne t Fax . There are two meth ods of receiving e- mail: Au to E-mail Rece ption and Ma nual E- mail Rec ept ion. Limitatio n ❒ E-mail with attachm ents ot her than TIFF-F form at files cannot be received . Senders receive an Error Mail Not if[...]

  • Página 463

    Receivin g Inter net Fax 53 3 B B B B Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Accesses the server to chec k for e- mail. E-mail is in the server A Start printing and receiving in the memory. If the receiving is finished, the stand by display appears. E-mail is not in the server A Press [ Exit ] . The standby display appears. AAN207F On Hook Dial On [...]

  • Página 464

    Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 54 3 Received Image s Here is an example of an Internet Fax message sent fr om this mac hine and re- ceived on a com puter using Outlook e-m ail software. The re ceiv ed im age v arie s ac cord ing to e- mail s oftw are . 1. E-mail transmit ted without speci- fying a subject in “E -mail Options”. 2. E-mail transmi[...]

  • Página 465

    55 4. Programming Initial Setti ngs and Adjustments You can send i nformation to the ot her party wh en tran smit ting or receivi ng a fax message . Thi s infor mation is show n on the disp lay of the othe r ma- chine and pri nted as a report. The fol- lowing information can be sent. Important ❒ You can co nfirm p rogra mmed set- tings from the U[...]

  • Página 466

    Programming 56 4 Programming A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If the key operator co de is pro- grammed and turne d on, en ter the key op erato r cod e (maxi- mum 8 di git) using nu[...]

  • Página 467

    Initia l Sett ings and Ad justme nts 57 4 B Enter an ow n name, a nd then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Refe rence "Entering Text", General Set- tings Guide. Programming an Own F ax Number A Select [ Own Fax Numb er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter an own fa x[...]

  • Página 468

    Programming 58 4 D D D D Sele ct [ Program Fax Inf ormation ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Sele ct [ Fax He ader ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key. All c[...]

  • Página 469

    Initia l Sett ings and Ad justme nts 59 4 D D D D Sele ct [ Program Fax Inf ormation ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Sele ct [ Fax He ader ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { Clea[...]

  • Página 470

    Programming 60 4 Programming Fax Numbers and E-mail addres ses You can program fax destinations using Address Boo k Management in the Key Operator Too ls menu under System Settings. You can also register the programmed fax n umbers and e-m ail addresses in a Grou p. Note ❒ When you try to return to the stand by display afte r changing the co nten[...]

  • Página 471

    61 5. Troubleshooting Adjusting the Volume You ca n chan ge t he vol ume o f th e fol- lowing sounds that the machine make s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ On Hook Mode Heard when the { { { { On Hook Dial } } } } key is pressed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ At Transmissi on Heard when the machi ne sends a message. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ At Reception Heard wh en the machine re ceive[...]

  • Página 472

    Troublesh ooting 62 5 G G G G You can adj ust the volume usi ng { { { {W W W W} } } } or { { { {V V V V} } } } . Note ❒ You ca n adj ust the volume b y seven levels. H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ Press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key to canc el setting and the display returns to that of step E . I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { U[...]

  • Página 473

    When { Facsim ile } Key Is L it in R ed 63 5 When { { { { Facsimile } } } } Key Is Lit in Red If thi s key is lit, press the key to ent er th e facsimi le mod e. Then , refer to the ta ble below and take the appropr iate acti on. Problem S olutions A facsimile error has occurred. The facsimile has a problem. Contact you r service representative. Se[...]

  • Página 474

    Troublesh ooting 64 5 When Toner Runs Out When the machi ne has run out of ton- er, t he s ymbol appears on t he di spl ay. Note that even if there is no toner left, you can still send fax messages. Important ❒ The number of communi cations, that have been exec uted after the toner h as run out and that auto - matically-output Journal has not lis[...]

  • Página 475

    Error Mess ages and Their Mean ings 65 5 Error Mes sages and Thei r Me anings If there is an error, one of the following me ssages may appear on the display. If other message appears, follow the message. Messa ge Causes a nd solut ions Put orig inal back, check it and pres s Star t key. Original jamme d during Memory Transm is- sion. Place original[...]

  • Página 476

    Troublesh ooting 66 5 Chec k whet her th ere ar e any netw ork pr oble ms. [14-01] Cannot find th e DNS serve r or SMTP serve r. • Check the DNS serv er is co rrectly pr o- grammed using the Web browser. See the Web bro wser's He lp. • Check th e SMTP serve r is corre ctly pro- grammed using the Web browser. See the Web bro wser's He [...]

  • Página 477

    Error Mess ages and Their Mean ings 67 5 Chec k whet her th ere ar e any netw ork pr oble ms. [15-02] No account name is programmed. • Check the user name a nd passw ord of the e-mai l a ccoun t ar e co rrec tly pro gra mmed from Fax Mail R eceptio n Accoun t under File Transfer in System Settings. See "Set- tings You Can Chang e with U ser [...]

  • Página 478

    Troublesh ooting 68 5 - - - - Out of pa per displ ay messa ge If the pa per tray runs out of pap er, “ Out of pap er. Load it , then press [Exit]. ” appears on the disp lay, asking you to add more paper. Note ❒ If there is paper left in t he other paper trays, you can receive messages as usu- al, even if the message app ears on the display. ?[...]

  • Página 479

    Solving Probl ems 69 5 Solving P roblems This table lists some common problems and their solutions. Problem Ca uses and solu tions Reference Image background appears dirty when recei ved at the oth er en d. Imag es from the back page appear. Adjust scan densit y. p.27 “ Image Densi ty (Con- trast) ” Printed or sent image contains spo ts. The AD[...]

  • Página 480

    Troublesh ooting 70 5 When using On Hook Dial or Manual Dial, " Receiving " appears and tran smission is not al lowed. If the mac hine fails to detect the size of the original when the { { { { Start } } } } key is pressed, it performs a receivi ng opera- tion. p.14 “ If th e Mac hin e Cann ot Detect the Size of Your Origi- nal ” All f[...]

  • Página 481

    When Things Don' t Go as Expected 71 5 When Things D on't Go as Expect ed I Want... Operation Reference to cancel a Mem ory Transmis- sio n. If the origi nal is be ing scanned, pr ess the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key. p.19 “ Canceling a Mem ory Transmission ” If the original is b eing sent or if it is in standb y, press the { { { { [...]

  • Página 482

    72 INDEX A Adju st ing t he V olu me , 61 At Dialing , 61 At Pr inting , 61 At Recept ion , 61 At Transmission , 61 On Hook Mode , 61 Attach Subject , 45 Aut hor ized R ec ept ion , 42 Auto E-ma il Recepti on , 52 B Batch T ransmissi on , 42 Broadcasting , 16 Broadcasting Seq uence , 18 C Chain Di al , 42 Control P anel , 3 CSI->Own Fax Number ,[...]

  • Página 483

    73 O On Hook Dial , 42 Origin al Type , 26 Out of paper , 68 Own Fax Number , 55 Deleti ng , 58 Editing , 57 Programming , 56 Own Name , 55 Deleti ng , 58 Editing , 57 Programming , 56 P Paus e , 30 Pho to , 26 Placing Ori ginals , 11 Progr amm ing , 55 Q Quick Dial Specifying a d estination , 32 Specifying a group of destinations , 32 R Rec eived [...]

  • Página 484

    74 AE AE B620-86 08 MEMO Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page 74 Mon day, S eptem ber 29, 2003 11 :36 AM[...]

  • Página 485

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =80 // Print s cale=81 % Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Intr oduc tio n This man ual des cribes d etaile d instr ucti ons on the ope ration and no tes about the u se of this machine. To get max imum vers atilit y fr[...]

  • Página 486

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =80 // Print s cale=81 % Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thickness / 2 = 0 mm FAX Option Type 201 8 Operating Instructions Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> FAX Op tion T ype 2 018 Operat ing In structio ns Facsimile Reference &[...]

  • Página 487

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =124 // Print s cale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.96 0000 mm FAX Option T ype 2018 Operatin g Instructi ons Facsimil e Reference <Adv anced Featur es> FAX Option Type 2018 Operating Instructions Facsimile [...]

  • Página 488

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =124 // Print s cale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.96 0000 mm Introduc tion This manu al describe s detai led instr uctions on the operation and notes abo ut the use of thi s machin e. To get maximum ver satili t[...]

  • Página 489

    i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the op erational procedures o f this machine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specif ic to machin e type. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view the man uals as a PDF file. ❒ Two CD-ROMs are provided: • CD-ROM 1“O[...]

  • Página 490

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Bin der V 2 L ite is a util ity i ncl uded on t he C D-R OM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Do cume nt M ana ge ment Util itie s ” . • DeskTopBin der V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in [...]

  • Página 491

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ......... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ...... i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ..... ........ ...... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ ... 1 Symbols ....... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......... ...[...]

  • Página 492

    iv More Tran smissio n Function s .... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... . 31 If Memory Runs Ou t While Storing a n Original ..... .......... ....... .......... ...... ....... .......... . 31 Parallel Memor y Transmission ...... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... ...... .........[...]

  • Página 493

    v 5. Using Fax with Computers Sending Fax Do cuments f rom C omputers ........ ..... ........ ..... ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 49 Before Use .......... ...... .......... ....... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......... ....... .... 50 Installing the Software ...... ....... .......... ...... ........... ....[...]

  • Página 494

    vi 7. Key Oper ato r Set tin g Key Ope rator T ools Li st .... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... . 7 5 Using Ke y Opera tor Se ttings ...... ...... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ..... ........ ...... ... 76 Counters.......... .......... ....... .......... ....... .....[...]

  • Página 495

    1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manual, the followi ng symbols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious i njury when you misuse th e machine without fol lowing the in- structi ons under t his symbo l. Be su re to rea d the inst ruction s, all of which a re in- c[...]

  • Página 496

    2 Names of Major Options The followi ng software produc ts are referred to using a gen eral name: • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional → DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite /Professional Major op tions o f thi s mach ine are referre d to a s foll ows in t his m anual: • Auto Docume nt Feeder → ADF • Auto Docume nt Feeder ca pable[...]

  • Página 497

    3 1. Transmission Mode Sending at a Speci fic Time (Send Later) Usin g this func tion , you can instru ct the m achin e to dela y tra nsmis sion of your fax message until a spec ified la t- er time. This allows you to take ad- va ntage of o ff-p eak te lep hone charges without having to be by th e machi ne at the time . If you have a non-u rgent fa[...]

  • Página 498

    Transmissi on Mode 4 1 D D D D Sele ct [ Send at sp ecifie d time ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To can cel the setti ng, select [ Off ] , and then p ress the { { { { OK } } } } key. The display re turns to that of step C . E E E E Enter the time using the number keys ([...]

  • Página 499

    User Tr ansmission 5 1 User T ransmi ssion This functio n allow s you to check each us er o r de par tme nt's tra nsm is- sion history. To use the function, you need to program a user code (eight digits max.) for ea ch user or depart- m ent , to be e nte re d b efo r e tra ns mi s- sion. See General Settings Guide . I f a u s e r c o d e s e t[...]

  • Página 500

    Transmissi on Mode 6 1 ❒ When canceling transmission by use r code, t o dele te the pro - grammed user code, press the { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key, and then the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The dis play re turns to that o f step C . When your e-mail addres s is programmed with the us er code If your e-ma[...]

  • Página 501

    Two-Sided Tr ansmission (Dou ble-S ided Transmi ssion) 7 1 Two-Sided Transmissi on (Double-Sided Transmiss ion) The optiona l ARDF is required. Use thi s funct ion to sen d two-si ded original s. Note ❒ Originals placed on the exposure glass cannot be sent. ❒ The front and back of the scanned origi nal will be prin ted in ord er on separate she[...]

  • Página 502

    Transmissi on Mode 8 1 B B B B Pre ss [ TX Mode ] . C C C C Sele ct [ 2 Sided TX ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Specify the transmission mode from [ 2 Sided fr om 1st Page ] or [ 1 Sid- ed fo r 1st Page ] , and th en press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To canc el[...]

  • Página 503

    E-mail Op tions 9 1 E-mail Options When using the Internet Fax function, you can make the following settings: • Attach Subje ct You can enter a subjec t for the e- mail you want to send. Note ❒ For convenience, program fre- quen tly used subj ects. [ Urgent ] and [ High ] are p rog ramm ed by default. See "File Transfer", Net- work Gu[...]

  • Página 504

    Transmissi on Mode 10 1 Fax Header Print In some cases, you may want the oth- er party to rec eive a n unmarked copy of your origi nal. To do this, swi tch Fax Header off. When the Fax Header is set to “ On ” , the stor ed name i s printe d on th e re- ceiver 's p aper . Note ❒ You can program a fax header name using the Program Fax Info[...]

  • Página 505

    Label I nsert ion 11 1 Label Inse rtio n With this function you can have the receiver name printed on the message when it is received at the other end. The name wi ll be print ed at the to p of the page and will be preceded by “ To: ” . Note ❒ When ther e is an image around the area where the Label is to be pr int- ed, that image is deleted. [...]

  • Página 506

    Transmissi on Mode 12 1 Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page 12 Mon day, S eptem ber 29, 2003 11 :39 AM[...]

  • Página 507

    13 2. Communication Information After you have pressed the { { { { Start } } } } key (after scanning originals), you can chec k and edit the dest ination or setti ngs of Memo ry Transmiss ion. You can also c an- cel a transmission, print a stored file and print a list of stored files. • Memory Transmission p.16 “ Memory Transmissio n ” , Facs[...]

  • Página 508

    Communicati on Informat ion 14 2 Note ❒ If mult iple dest inati ons were specif ied, only o ne d estina tion number appears. D D D D Pre ss [ Dele te ] . The selected file is deleted. T he displ ay re turns to that of ste p B . Note ❒ To quit transmission cancel, press [ No ] . ❒ To cancel another transmission, repe at fro m st ep B . E E E E[...]

  • Página 509

    Printi ng a List of Fil es in Memory (Print TX Standby File List ) 15 2 Printing a Li st of Files in Memory (Print TX Standby File List) Print this list if you want to fi nd out which fi les are st ored in memory and what their file numb ers are. Knowing the file num ber can be u seful (for ex- ample when er asing files). Note ❒ The conten ts of [...]

  • Página 510

    Communicati on Informat ion 16 2 Checking the Transmission Re sult (TX File Status) You can browse a par t of the Trans- mission Result Repo rt on the display . Note ❒ Only the transmission result of the last 100 commun ications (recep- tions & transmissio ns) are shown. ❒ You can also chec k the transmis - sion re sult using We b brows er.[...]

  • Página 511

    Checking th e Reception Res ult (RX File Stat us) 17 2 Check ing the Recepti on Result (RX File Status) You can browse a part of the Recep- tion R esul t Report on the displ ay. Note ❒ Only the re ception result of t he last 100 communic ations (receptio ns & transmissions) are shown. ❒ You can also ch eck the rec eptio n result using Web b[...]

  • Página 512

    Communicati on Informat ion 18 2 Printing a File (Print TX Standby File) If you want to c heck the co ntents of a file that is store d in mem ory and not yet sen t, use this procedu re to p rint it out. Note ❒ You can also pr int files t hat have not been successfully transmitted. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Job Inform ation } } } } key. B B B B [...]

  • Página 513

    Printing a F ile Received wi th Memory Lock ( Print Memory Loc k File) 19 2 Printing a Fil e Recei ved with Memory Lock (Print Memory L ock Fi le) This i s a sec urity function designed to preve nt u naut hori zed u sers fr om reading your messages. If M emory Lock is s witch ed on, all rece ived me s- sag e s are st or ed in mem or y and are not a[...]

  • Página 514

    Communicati on Informat ion 20 2 D D D D Enter a 4-digit M emory Lock ID usin g the numb er key s, a nd th en pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. The dis play re turns to that o f step C . Note ❒ If the Me mory Loc k ID doe s not match, the m essage " Spec ified code does not match the programmed Memory Lock ID. " appears, and then t[...]

  • Página 515

    Printi ng the Journa l 21 2 Printing the Journal The Journal contains information about the last 50 communica tions (maximum) made by your machine. It is print ed auto matic ally aft er every 50 communicat ions (receptio ns & trans- miss ion s). You ca n also pr int a cop y of the Jour - nal at any time by follow ing the pro- cedure b elow. Imp[...]

  • Página 516

    Communicati on Informat ion 22 2 Journal 1. Printing date Shows the d ate and time when the report is printed. 2. Programme d sender name Shows the sender name program med for printin g. 3. Date Shows the transm ission or re ception dat e. 4. Time Shows the tr ansmis sion or re ceptio n start time . 5. Other en d T o p r i o r i t i z e a f a x n u[...]

  • Página 517

    Printi ng the Journa l 23 2 6. Communication mode • For fax transmissions and receptions Aft er “ T ” for outgoing fax or “ R ” for ingoing fax, s hows a com munication mode . • For Internet Fax transmissions and re- ception s After the e-ma il symbol, and " T" for outgoing e-mail or "R" for ingoin g e- mail, t he co[...]

  • Página 518

    Communicati on Informat ion 24 2 E-mail Rece ptio n You can rece ive I nternet Fax do cu- ments ma nually usi ng the { { { { Job I nfo r- mation } } } } key. Newly-arrived e-mail is printed out when receiv ed manually. Note ❒ E-ma il can al so be r eceiv ed manu - ally using the User Function keys. See p.52 “ Receiving Internet Fax ” , Facsim[...]

  • Página 519

    25 3. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This allows you to compose a tel e- phone number from various parts, some of which may be store d in Quick Dials and some of which may be entered usin g the number keys. Note ❒ Maximum length o f a telephone or fax number: 128 digits. ❒ For Memory Transmission and Im - mediate[...]

  • Página 520

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 26 3 Redial The ma chine stores th e last 1 0 desti- nati ons spec if ied. If you wa nt to se nd a message to a destination which you sent faxes to recently, the Redial f unc- tion saves you t ime by finding and entering the destination again. Limitatio n ❒ The following kinds of desti na- tions are not st ored: • [...]

  • Página 521

    On Hook Dial 27 3 On Hook Dial The On Hook Dial functio n allows you to dial w hile hearing tone fr om the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connecti on. Note ❒ This fu nct ion is un avai lab le in some countries. A A A A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require. Referen ce p.11 “ Placing Originals ” ,[...]

  • Página 522

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 28 3 Manual Dial The externa l telephone i s required. Pick up the handset of the external telephone and dial. When the lin e is connected and you hear a high- pitched tone, press the { { { { Star t } } } } key to send your fax message. If, on the oth- er hand, you hear a voice a t the other end, continue conversation [...]

  • Página 523

    Transmiss ion Features 29 3 Transmiss ion Features Sta mp The op tio nal A DF o r AR DF is req uir ed. When sending a fax mess age using the ADF or AR DF, the mach ine ca n stamp a circle mark at the bottom of the original. When sending a two-sid- ed documen t, t he docume nt is marked at the bot tom of the fr ont page and top of th e rear p age . [...]

  • Página 524

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 30 3 C C C C Specify the destin ation, and then pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ The Stamp indicator go es out when transmission has been fin- ished for Immediate Transmis- sion or when scanni ng has been finished for Memory Transmis- sion. Detecting Bl ank Shee t Upon c ompl eti on of the f irst pag e s[...]

  • Página 525

    More Tran smission Functio ns 31 3 More Transmission Functions If M emory Runs Ou t Whil e Storing an Origin al If memory runs out while storing or sending an original (free space reach- es 0%), one of the following m essages appear s. Pres s [ Exit ] to transmit stored pages only. • During Memory Transmissio n: " Memory is full . Scan ning [...]

  • Página 526

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 32 3 Checking the Tra nsmission Result • Turn the Transmission Result Re- port on if you want a report to be print ed after every success ful transmissio n. See p.35 “ Transmis- sion Result Report (Memory Transmission) ” . • If you leave the Tr ansmission Re- sult Report off, t he repor t will not be printed af[...]

  • Página 527

    More Tran smission Functio ns 33 3 Dual Access The machine can scan other messages into memory even while sending a fax message from memory, receiving a mes sage into memor y, or auto mati- cally printing a repo rt. Since the ma- chine starts sending the second message immedi ately after the cur- rent transmission ends, the line is used efficie ntl[...]

  • Página 528

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 34 3 Note ❒ If the key operator's e-mail address is wrong, you m ay not be able to acq uir e Jo urna l. ❒ If the Journa l in e-mail format fails to be transmitted, the Journal is print ed out. ❒ The name of an attache d CSV file is "JOURNAL+year, mont h, hours, mi n- utes ". Fo r e xample, the file[...]

  • Página 529

    Printed Report 35 3 Printed Report Memory Storage Report Thi s repo rt is prin ted afte r an orig inal is stored in me mory. It helps yo u re- view the contents and th e destina- tions of stored origina ls. Limitatio n ❒ If you use Parall el Memory Trans- miss ion , t he Me mory Sto rage Re- port is not printe d. Note ❒ You can tu rn this repor[...]

  • Página 530

    Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 36 3 Communication Failure Rep ort This repo rt is pri nted when a message coul d not be s ucces sfully tran smitted with Memory Transmission. If the machine is set up to print a Transmis sion Result Report , this re- port is not printed. Use it to keep a record of failed transmissio ns so you can send th em ag ain. No[...]

  • Página 531

    37 4. Reception Features Recepti on Imme diate Rece ption Each page of a fax messag e i s prin ted as soon as it is received. This method is used for standard fax messages. Nor mal ly t his m ach ine rece ives me s- sages by Immediate Reception. How- ever, dependi ng on settings or certain conditions, Mem ory Reception or Subs titute R ecep tion is[...]

  • Página 532

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 38 4 Important ❒ When abou t one h our pass es af ter power of the m achine is turned off, all fax messages stored in memory will be lost. If an y messag es have been lost for t his r eason , a Po wer Failu re Repor t is au tomatically printe d when th e operation sw itch is turned on. Use this report to ide nt ify lo st m[...]

  • Página 533

    Recepti on 39 4 Receiving mes sages uncon ditionally If one of th e conditions listed belo w occurs , the machin e receiv es all fax messag- es using Subs titute Re ception. Receiving messages accordi ng to parameter-specified setting s If one of the con ditions listed below occurs, the m achine receives on ly those mes- sages that match the condit[...]

  • Página 534

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 40 4 Reception Functions Forwar ding Received Docu ments This machin e can forward received documents to other destinations pro- grammed in memory based on Own Name, Own Fax Numb er or sender's e-mail address. I f a se nder's e -mail addres s is prog rammed a s the de stination, docu- ments received are forwarded a[...]

  • Página 535

    Reception Fu nctions 41 4 SMTP Reception Using Inter net Fax You can se t SMT P recep tion w ith this machi ne. W i t h S M T P r e c e p t i o n , e - m a i l i s r e c e i v e d a s s o o n a s i t i s s e n t t o t h e e - m a i l a d d r e s s set by the machine. Y ou can route received e-mail to other Interne t Fax machines also. Note ❒ DNS [...]

  • Página 536

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 42 4 Routing E-mail Received via SMTP E-mail received via SM TP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also be routed to destinat ions prog rammed as Quick Dial entrie s or Groups . Prep arat ion Before routi ng e-mail received via SMTP, you fir st must set "SMTP RX File Delivery Settings" to "On". S[...]

  • Página 537

    Reception Fu nctions 43 4 - - - - Specif ying E- mail Transfer The originator can request tr ansfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec- ifying the e-m ail address as follows: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Number fax=destination fax number@ host name of this machine. domai n name Example: to transfer to fax number 212- 123-4567, specify: fax=212123[...]

  • Página 538

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 44 4 Printing Options Print Completi on Beep When this f unction is t urned on, the machine be eps to let you know when a received message has been printed. Note ❒ You can a lter the volum e of the beep or turn it off completely (set the v olum e to th e mi nimu m leve l) . See p.61 “ Adjusting the Volume ” , Facsimile[...]

  • Página 539

    Prin ting Opti ons 45 4 Reception Time You can have th e da te and time pri nt- ed at the botto m of the message when it is re ceived . You c an tur n this f unc- tion on or o ff using Rece ption Set- tings. See p.73 “ R ece ptio n S et ting s ” . Note ❒ When a received m essage is print- ed on tw o or mor e sheet s, th e date and time is pri[...]

  • Página 540

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 46 4 Note ❒ You can tu rn this f unction o n or off with the User Parameters. See p.80 “ User Parameters ” (switch 10, b it 1). ❒ This funct ion use s Memor y Rec ep- tion. Page Separation and Length Reduction When the size of a received m essage is longe r than the paper l oaded in t he machine, eac h page of the me[...]

  • Página 541

    Prin ting Opti ons 47 4 When There Is No Paper of th e Correct Size If there is no paper in you r machine that ma tches the size of a received message, the machine will choose a paper size based on the paper availa- ble. For examp le, if your machin e has 8 1 / 2 " × 11" K and A 3 L loaded and you receive a A4 L size message, check the A[...]

  • Página 542

    Rec ept io n Fe atur es 48 4 Setting priority trays With the same size of paper loaded into mu ltip le t rays, y ou ca n m ake the machine u se one tray for one funct ion and another tray fo r another functio n. For exampl e, you m ay load white A 4 or 8 1 / 2 " × 11" paper in to tray 1 to use when maki ng copi es, an d yell ow A4 or 8 1[...]

  • Página 543

    49 5. Using Fax with Computers Sendin g Fax Document s from Comput ers The optional printer/sca nner unit is required. Using com puters connected to th e machine thro ugh parallel ports, IEE E 1394 (IP Over 1394) ports, LANs, or wireless LANs, you can fax documents, created us- ing Windo ws applications, to other fax m achines over a tel ephone lin[...]

  • Página 544

    Using Fax with Co mputers 50 5 Before Use To use these features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer. Use the L AN -Fax dr iver included o n the printer CD-ROM. You m ust also mak e the re quired computer to fa x network setti ngs on the ma chine, accor ding to the type o f co nnec tio n. Referenc e When a personal c omputer and the[...]

  • Página 545

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 51 5 ❒ Auto Run might not work auto- maticall y with cer tain OS s ettings. If this is the case, doubl e-clic k “ Set - up.exe ” , lo cated on t he CD -ROM root d irector y. ❒ If you want to c ancel Auto Run, hold do wn th e { { { { SHIFT } } } } key (when your system is Windows 2000/Windows XP or Wind[...]

  • Página 546

    Using Fax with Co mputers 52 5 Applications Stored on the CD-ROM This sect ion provide s informati on about LAN-Fax D river, Address Book, and L AN-Fa x Cove r She et Ed i- tor. LAN-Fax Driver This drive r allows you to use LAN- Fax fu nct io ns. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Locatio n of the File The f ollow ing fold ers a re on th e CD-ROM: • LAN-Fax Driver [...]

  • Página 547

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 53 5 Setting LAN-F ax Properties This section de scribes ho w to ma ke sett in gs suc h as paper siz e, re sol u- tion , a nd op tio ns. • Paper Size: • Orientation: • Tray: • Resolution : • Gray Scale: (Windows 95/98/Me) • Print as graphic s (Windows 95/98/Me) • Reduce 400dpi image data t o 200d[...]

  • Página 548

    Using Fax with Co mputers 54 5 Basic Tr ansmission This section descri bes how to send fax documents created using Windows applicat ions. To sen d a fax, simply select [ Print ] from the Windows application, then select [ LAN-Fax M4 ] as the printer, and the n spe cify a dest inati on in th e [ LAN- Fax ] dial og b ox. Open the applic ation documen[...]

  • Página 549

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 55 5 Specifying a destination by directly entering a fax num ber A Enter a fax number i n the [ Fax Number: ] box. Note ❒ To enter a pause, cli ck [ Pause ] . B Click [ Next N umb er ] . The entered destination is add- ed and displayed in the [ Lis t of Destina tions : ] box. Note ❒ If you do not want the [...]

  • Página 550

    Using Fax with Co mputers 56 5 Attaching a cover sheet Selecting the [ Attach a Cover Sheet ] check box causes a cover s heet to be attached to the top of th e fax docu- ment. The cover shee t includes the foll ow- ing items: • Compan y Name a s destination info. • Department Name as destinat ion info. • Contact Name as destination info. • [...]

  • Página 551

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 57 5 - - - - Trans missi on r esult notifi catio n Aft er you ha ve sen t faxe s, th is fun c- tion informs yo u whether the fax was successfully transmitted to its desti- nati on o r not . When yo u use thi s machi ne just as a print er, this functi on also infor ms you whether data was successfully trans- mi[...]

  • Página 552

    Using Fax with Co mputers 58 5 Printing and Saving You can pri nt do cuments created us- ing Windows applications. You can al so save documents in TIF format. Open the applic ation document you wan t to pr int or cre ate a ne w doc u- ment, and t hen perf orm th e fol lowi ng procedur e. For details, see Help. Note ❒ You can select whether to cau[...]

  • Página 553

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 59 5 Editing Addr ess Book You can progr am an d edi t des tin a- tions in the address list using the Ad - dres s B ook. For details, see Help. A A A A On the [ St art ] menu, poin t to [ Pro- grams ] , [ LAN-Fax Util ities ] , an d then click [ Addres s Book ] . The Address Book display ap- pears. Note ❒ If[...]

  • Página 554

    Using Fax with Co mputers 60 5 - - - - Usin g the m ach ine' s Add res s Book data as the LAN-Fax's Address Bo ok data You can retrieve the A ddress Boo k data of this machine using SmartDe- viceM oni tor fo r Ad min an d edit it to program in the LAN-Fax's Address Book. Referenc e For m ore in fo rma tion, see Hel p on SmartDeviceMo[...]

  • Página 555

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 61 5 Edit ing Fax Cover Sheets LAN-Fax C over Sh eet Ed itor al lows you to edit the form at for fax cover shee ts. It is ne cessar y to c reate a cover sheet file before attaching a cover sheet to fax messages using LAN-Fax Dri ve r. Creating a cover sheet Use the follo wing procedure to c reate a fax cover s[...]

  • Página 556

    Using Fax with Co mputers 62 5 E E E E Enter the destination informa- tion. Note ❒ You can sele ct [ Use Address Book ] , [ To Whom It May Concern ] , [ Edit Names ] , or [ Non e ] . Sel ectin g [ Edit Na mes ] al lows you t o ent er company, de partment, and per - son names. F F F F To print the date, select the [ With a Date ] chec k box. G G G[...]

  • Página 557

    Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 63 5 LAN-Fax Operati on Message s Note ❒ You ca n have the LAN-Fa x Er ror Repo rt p rinte d when opti ons a re not prop- erly sele cted, or there is a communication error with a computer. See p .80 “ User Para meters ” (swit ch 20, bit 0). LAN-Fax Error Report This rep ort is print ed wh en optio ns are[...]

  • Página 558

    Using Fax with Co mputers 64 5 Editing Rec eiver 's Fax Informatio n Via Web Browse r When th e rece ive r being pro- gram med or added to t he add ress book i s a T. 37 full mode compati ble type wit h the Inte rnet F ax fun ction, you can set the foll owing recei ver's fax inf orm atio n u sin g a W eb b row ser . • Compression t ype [...]

  • Página 559

    Editing Receiver's Fax Inform ation Via Web Br owser 65 5 B Under [ Intern et Fax Data F ormat ] , set the items of fax information to meet the receiver 's specifica- tions, excep t for [ Select mode ] . Note ❒ If [ Simpl e mod e ] is sel ected , the fax information cannot be set. Selec t the T.37 full mode compatible receiver in step A[...]

  • Página 560

    Using Fax with Co mputers 66 5 Kir-C2 -AEcom bine_F _FM.book Page 66 Mon day, S eptem ber 29, 2003 11 :39 AM[...]

  • Página 561

    67 6. Facsimile Features Function List The User Tool s allow you to program your identification, stor e frequently used number s and settings, and custom ize default setti ngs to meet your needs. The User Tools are grouped by functions so that you can quickly and easily fi nd the de sire d User Tool. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print List/Report ❖ ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 562

    Facsimil e Features 68 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail Setting s ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator Tool s - - - - Displa ys • Press the { { { { User To ols/Counter } } } } key to enter User Tools menu. • You can switch the display using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . • The selected item is highlighted. • When you h ave made all requir[...]

  • Página 563

    Func tio n List 69 6 - - - - Key Operator Code When Key Op erator Cod e is programm ed and turn ed on, user s have to enter a progr ammed Ke y Oper ator C ode (eight di gits ma ximum) to o perat e th e User Tools. This prevents unauthorized peop le from changing settings. Note ❒ You can turn the K ey Operator Co de on or off i n “ System Sett i[...]

  • Página 564

    Facsimil e Features 70 6 Accessi ng User Tools (Fac simile Feature s) Customize the fac simile settings ac- cording to the operations to be fre- quentl y perfo rmed. Note ❒ The mac hine a llows you to chang e the facsimile defaults in a mode that is no t the fac simile mo de. Af- ter changing the defaults, select facsimil e mode agai n. Thi s sec[...]

  • Página 565

    Accessing User Tools ( Facsimil e Featu res) 71 6 E E E E Follow the displayed instructions to chang e the default, and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Depending on the me nu, you may need t o re peat s tep E . When yo u have sele cted the pri nt menu, press the { { { { Start } } } } key to print . Note ❒ If you make a mistake, repeat fr[...]

  • Página 566

    Facsimil e Features 72 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print TX Sta ndby Fi le Li st (P rint Transmission Standby Fil e List) Use t his fun cti on to pri nt t he tra ns- mission standby file list. A Sele ct [ Print TX Standby Fil e List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If the machi ne i[...]

  • Página 567

    Accessing User Tools ( Facsimil e Featu res) 73 6 • TX by User Code (Tran smission by User Code) • Transmission Stamp • E-mail Opt ions • Print TX St atus Report (Print Transmission Stat us Report) • Manual E-mail Recept ion A Select User Function key yo u want t o progra m. B Select the functi on you want to program in the U ser Function[...]

  • Página 568

    Facsimil e Features 74 6 A Sele ct [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Ent er th e max imu m e-ma il size using the number keys. Note ❒ Maximum e-mail size can be between 64 and 8586 KB. C Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ SMTP RX File Delivery (SMTP Recep- tio[...]

  • Página 569

    75 7. Key Operator Setting Key Operator Too ls L ist You can also set the line type for the machine connec tion, program Memory Lock I D, fax destinations, and many o ther items. In addition, you can c heck th e numb er of document s transmi tted and re ceived. Function name D escription Reference Communicati on Page Count Checks the transm ission [...]

  • Página 570

    Key Operator Set ting 76 7 Using Ke y Oper ator Set tings Counters This f unction al lows y ou to check the total num ber of pages tran smitted and rece ived on the display. • Transmissions: Total nu mber o f transmi tted pag es • Recepti ons: Total number of received pages A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Se[...]

  • Página 571

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 77 7 Note ❒ An e-mail address can be set as the forwarding destinati on. ❒ If you do not progra m an End Re- ceiver, the machin e performs printing but not forwarding even with the For warding f unc tio n On. ❒ You can progr am one of the User Funct ion ke ys with opera tions for this func tion . You can then swi[...]

  • Página 572

    Key Operator Set ting 78 7 Note ❒ If there is an End Receiver al ready programmed, a receiver name is shown. If you w ant to change the receiver, press the { { { { Clear/St op } } } } key and proceed to step F . ❒ To cancel Forwarding, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key and proc eed to step G . F F F F Spec ify an En d Re ceiv er us ing t he [...]

  • Página 573

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 79 7 Memory Lock When you switch Memor y Lock on, received messages are stored in mem- ory and not print ed automat ically. When a mess age is received in the Memor y Loc k mode , the R ecei ve Fi le indicato r blinks. To prin t this mes- sage, enter the Memory Lock ID. A user without the ID cannot print th e message. [...]

  • Página 574

    Key Operator Set ting 80 7 User P aramet ers User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To change function settings , set the User Param eter Swit ches. Prep arat ion Access t o some U ser Param eter Se ttings requir es othe r settin gs be mad e be- forehand. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Switches and Bits Each User Parameter has[...]

  • Página 575

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 81 7 05 0 Receive S ervice Call (SC) Conditio n (Substit ute Rece p- tion duri ng service c all) Possible (Substi- tute RX) Not possible (Re- ceptio n off) 2, 1 Substitute the rec eption wh en the mac hine ca nnot print (b ecause all pa- per trays have run out of p aper, toner is e mpty, or all pap er trays are out of [...]

  • Página 576

    Key Operator Set ting 82 7 18 0 P rint date w ith Fax Header Off On 1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Head er Off On 2 Print f ile numb er with F ax Head er Off On 3 Print page number with F ax Head er Off On 19 1 S ort Jour nal by line t ype Off On 20 0 Au tomatic printing of the LAN-Fa x Error Repo rt Off On 1 Reprint d ocume nts t hat could no[...]

  • Página 577

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 83 7 Changing the User Parameters Important ❒ We reco mme nd you pr int a nd keep a User Parameter l ist when you program or change a User Pa- rameter. See p.84 “ Printing the User Parameter List ” . ❒ Do not change any bit switch es other than t hose sho wn on the p re- vious pages. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { {[...]

  • Página 578

    Key Operator Set ting 84 7 Printing the User Parameter List Print this list t o see the current User Parameter settings. However, only item s of impor tan ce or ofte n-used items are i ncluded i n the list. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } [...]

  • Página 579

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 85 7 Home Position Items used for transmitting documents can be set as the home positions. When documents are sc anned and transmiss ion is c ompleted, items automatica lly re- turn to thei r home positions . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Home Posit ion Setti ng Func tions • Image Density Allows one of five image density steps to [...]

  • Página 580

    Key Operator Set ting 86 7 Imp orta nt ❒ If yo u tu rn th i s f un ct io n of f, t he sc al e of th e o rigi nal is m ai nt aine d an d some parts o f the image m ay be lost at the othe r end. • Fax Header Al l ow s t he fax he ad er a s t h e h om e po si t io n t o b e se t t o on or of f. S ee p.1 0 “ Fax Header Print ” . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖[...]

  • Página 581

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 87 7 Note ❒ For details about setting parameters , see p.80 “ User Param eters ” . Follow the pr ocedure below to set the hom e positi on par ameters. Important ❒ Do not chan ge any bit switches o ther than thos e shown in the above table. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sel[...]

  • Página 582

    Key Operator Set ting 88 7 F F F F Select the switch number you want to change u sing the scroll keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Select the bit number you want to change. When you press the bit number, the value switches between 1 and 0. Note ❒ Repeat from step G to change ano ther bit n umber for the same switch . H H H [...]

  • Página 583

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 89 7 Special Senders to Treat Differ ently By pr ogra mmin g pa rtic ula r recei ver s in advance, you can set the follow ing function for eac h receiver: • Author ized R eception • Forwarding • Memor y Lock Use the Own Name or Own Fax Number to program you r receiver s. If the rece iver has a machine of the same[...]

  • Página 584

    Key Operator Set ting 90 7 Note ❒ You can progr am up to 24 charac- ters for the sende r. ❒ You can che ck Own N ame and Own Fax Nu mber usin g the Jour- nal. You can check programmed Specia l Senders usi ng the sp ecified sender list. See p.21 “ Printing the Journal ” . See p.96 “ Printing the Special Se nder List ” . ❒ If you set &q[...]

  • Página 585

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 91 7 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Lock Use this func tion to stor e incoming documents from programmed senders (Special Sende rs) in mem- ory wi thout pr inting th em. Pe ople withou t the Memo ry L ock I D ca n- not pr int the do cu ments , and there fore this function i s use ful for receiving confidential documents. If yo[...]

  • Página 586

    Key Operator Set ting 92 7 G G G G Enter a de stina tio n nam e usin g the number keys, a nd then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Enter a destin ation name using Own Name or Own Fax Number. Referen ce “ Entering Tex t ” , General Set- tings Guide H H H H Sele ct [ Full Agr eemen t ] or [ Parti al Agre ement ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or {[...]

  • Página 587

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 93 7 B Select [ On ] or [ Off ] , usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then p ress the { { { { OK } } } } key. If you sele ct [ Off ] , proceed to step D . Note ❒ Selec tin g [ Sa me as Bas ic Se t- ting s ] will re sult in the same setting ma de for “ Forw ard- ing ” unde r “ Key Operato[...]

  • Página 588

    Key Operator Set ting 94 7 Deleting a Special Sende r Use th is fu nction to pro gram “ Init ial Set Up ” of a Special Se nder. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Sele ct [ Key Ope[...]

  • Página 589

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 95 7 Prog ramm ing Initi al Se t Up of a Speci al Send er Use th is fu nction to pro gram “ Init ial Set Up ” of a Special Se nder. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } [...]

  • Página 590

    Key Operator Set ting 96 7 Programming Special RX Function A Select [ Specia l RX F unc ti on ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select [ On ] or [ Off ] , and then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { Cancel } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { Use[...]

  • Página 591

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 97 7 G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. The standby display appears. Programming a Memory L ock ID Program a Memory Lo ck ID to be en- tered before pr inting docume nts when the Memory Lock fu nction is acti vated. Note ❒ A Memo ry Lo ck ID ca n be any four-digit number, except 00 00. A A A [...]

  • Página 592

    Key Operator Set ting 98 7 Selecting Dial/Push Phone Use this fu ncti on to se lect a li ne t ype. Dial and Pu sh lines are ava ilable for selection. Note ❒ This func tion is not ava ila ble in some areas. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} }[...]

  • Página 593

    Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 99 7 A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Features ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Sele ct [ Key Oper ator Tools ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then pre ss the { { {[...]

  • Página 594

    Key Operator Set ting 100 7 Outside Access No. A Select [ Outside Ac cess No . ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter the ou tside ac cess number using the number keys. Note ❒ To canc el the e ntry, pr ess the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key. C Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key[...]

  • Página 595

    101 8. Sol ving Operation Problems When An Error Repor t is Printed An Error Repor t is pr inted if a me s- sage cannot be successfully sent o r re- ceived . Possib le ca uses in clude a proble m with your machine or noise on t he tel- ephone line. If an error occurs during transmissio n, resend the original. If an error occurs d uring recepti on, [...]

  • Página 596

    Solving Operat ion Problems 102 8 Turning Off the M ain Po wer/In Ca se of a Power Failure R CAUTIO N: Even if the main p ower swi tch is turned off, the con tents of t he ma- chine memory (for example, pro- grammed numbers) will not be lost. Howeve r, if power is lost for a bout one hou r becaus e the main power switch is turned off, there is a po[...]

  • Página 597

    When an Error Occurs Using I nternet Fax 103 8 When an Error Occ urs Using Internet Fax Erro r Mail Noti ficat ion The ma chine sends the Error Ma il Notificat ion to the send er when i t is unable to successful ly receive a particular e -mail message . A "cc" of this notific ation is als o sent to t he key op erator's e-m ail addres[...]

  • Página 598

    Solving Operat ion Problems 104 8 Kir- C2-AEcom bine_F _FM.b ook Page 104 Mo nday, S epte mber 29 , 2003 1 1:39 A M[...]

  • Página 599

    105 9. Appendix Replacing the Stamp Car tridge The op tio nal A DF o r AR DF is req uir ed. When the stamp becomes lighter, re- place the c artridge. Note ❒ Use t he c art ridg e sp eci fi ed for thi s mach ine. ❒ Do not add ink to the c artridge by yourself. Neglecti ng this can cause ink leakage. ❒ Be sure not t o dirty your fingers with in[...]

  • Página 600

    Appendix 106 9 Connecti ng the Machine to a Telephone Line and Tel ephone Connecting the Telephone Line To connect th e machine to a tel ephone line, use a snap-in modular type c onnec- tor. Important ❒ Make s ure the connect or is the corr ect t ype bef ore you start. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Where to conn ect the machine 1. G3 interface unit connector 2[...]

  • Página 601

    Specificat ions 107 9 Speci fications ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Transmission and Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power Co nsumptio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception Standard G3 Resolution 8 × 3.85/ mm • 200 × 100 dpi (Stand ard), 8 × 7.7/mm • 200 × 200 dpi (Detail), 8 × 15.4/mm • 200 × 400 dpi (Fine) Transmission ti me 3 sec[...]

  • Página 602

    Appendix 108 9 *1 Supported for A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" or sm alle r size docume nt. Compatible Machines This machi ne can comm unicate with In ternet Fax machines that meet the follow- ing specification requirem ents. *1 Available in f ull mode, depend ing on the o ther party's se ttings. E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversio[...]

  • Página 603

    Specificat ions 109 9 Acceptabl e Types of Originals Make sure your or iginal s are comple tely dr y before settin g them in th e machine. Wet ink or corr ecting fluid from o riginals will mark the exposure glass and affect the res ult ing ima ge. Acceptable original sizes Note ❒ The ADF and ARDF are optional. Paper size and scanned area ❖ ❖ [...]

  • Página 604

    Appendix 110 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ ADF or ARDF Limitatio n ❒ There may be a difference i n the size of the image when it is pr inted at the des- tination. ❒ If you place an original lar ger than A3, 11" × 17" on the exposur e glass, only an A3, 11" × 17" are a is sc ann ed. Note ❒ E v e n i f a n o r i g i n a l i s c o r r [...]

  • Página 605

    Specificat ions 111 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch Ver sion × - Una ble to auto detect *1 Norma lly a leng th of abo ut 420 mm (16. 5") ca n be scan ned; how ever, i t is only p ossi- ble t o spe cif y a sc annin g siz e up t o 43 2 mm (1 7"). - - - - Maximum scan area The ma ximum scan area is shown below: • Memory Transmission: 297 × 1, 200[...]

  • Página 606

    Appendix 112 9 Maximum Values The followi ng list contains the maximum value fo r each item. Note ❒ The max imum num ber of pages that ca n be st ored or trans mitt ed may de- crease depending on the contents of docum ents. Item Descrip tion Memory 2 MB The number of pages that you can stor e in memory (Using A4 size Standard <ITU-T #4Chart>[...]

  • Página 607

    113 INDEX A Address B ook , 52 Applicat ions Stor ed on the CD-ROM , 52 Aut hor ized R ec ept ion , 73 , 90 Auto Fax Recept ion Powe r-up , 43 Automatic Redial , 32 Auto Reduce , 85 Auto run p rogra m , 50 B Basic Tran smiss ion , 54 Batch T ransmissi on , 32 C Cancel ing a Tr ansmiss ion , 13 Centre Mar k , 44 , 73 Chain Di al , 25 Checke red Mark[...]

  • Página 608

    114 J JBIG Reception , 43 Transmissi on , 33 Journ al , 22 , 71 Journ al by E-ma il , 34 Journal by E-mail, Transmitting , 33 Just s ize prin tin g , 48 K Key Operator Code , 69 Key Operator Settings , 76 Key Operator Tools , 68 Key Ope rator Tools L ist , 75 L Label Ins ertion , 11 LAN-Fax Cover Shee t Editor , 52 Driver , 52 Erro r Report , 63 Op[...]

  • Página 609

    115 S Scanned Area , 109 Sending Fax Docum ents from Computers , 49 Send Later , 3 Server- Generate d Error E-m ail , 103 SMTP r ecept ion , 41 SMTP RX File De livery , 74 Sound V olume , Adju st , 72 Special S ender Lis t , 96 Specia l Senders , 91 Special Se nders to T reat Differen tly , 89 Specifica tions , 107 Stamp , 29 Stamp Ca rtridg e , 10[...]

  • Página 610

    116 MEMO Kir- C2-AEcom bine_F _FM.b ook Page 116 Mo nday, S epte mber 29 , 2003 1 1:39 A M[...]

  • Página 611

    117 MEMO Kir- C2-AEcom bine_F _FM.b ook Page 117 Mo nday, S epte mber 29 , 2003 1 1:39 A M[...]

  • Página 612

    118 AE AE B620-86 58 MEMO Kir- C2-AEcom bine_F _FM.b ook Page 118 Mo nday, S epte mber 29 , 2003 1 1:39 A M[...]

  • Página 613

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =124 // Print s cale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.96 0000 mm Introduc tion This manu al describe s detai led instr uctions on the operation and notes abo ut the use of thi s machin e. To get maximum ver satili t[...]

  • Página 614

    Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg) , Paper Th ickness=80 µ m // Pag es in book =124 // Print s cale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × P aper thi ckness / 2 = 4.96 0000 mm FAX Option T ype 2018 Operatin g Instructi ons Facsimil e Reference <Adv anced Featur es> FAX Option Type 2018 Operating Instructions Facsimile [...]

  • Página 615

    Network Guide For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" be fore you use it. Functions Availabl e over a Network Connecting the Ne twork Cable to th e Network Setting Up the Machine on a Network Windows Configur ation Using the Pr inter Func tion Using Smar tDeviceMonit[...]

  • Página 616

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. Important Conte[...]

  • Página 617

    i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the re levant parts o f the manual . Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file. ❒ Three CD-ROMs are pr ovided: • CD-ROM 1 “O[...]

  • Página 618

    ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, an d the operatin g environment for De skTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail. This gu[...]

  • Página 619

    iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ......... ...... ....... .. i How to Read Thi s Manual ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ...... 1 1. Functions Available over a Netwo rk Usi ng th e P rinte r . .... .... ..... .[...]

  • Página 620

    iv 5. U sing the Prin ter Fun ction Printing wi th Windows ..... ...... ....... ..... ........ ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ... 45 Printing wi th a Windo ws 2000/ XP, Windo ws Server 2 003 or Window s NT 4.0 Prin t Server ... 4 5 Printin g witho ut a Pr int S erver .......... ...... ...... ......... ....... ...... .[...]

  • Página 621

    v 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet .......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 81 Using te lnet ...... ....... ...... ...... ...... .......... ...... ...... ...... ....... ......... ...... ...... ....... ...... ......... . 8 1 Comma nds L ist ....... ...... ......... ...... ....... ...... ...... .....[...]

  • Página 622

    vi[...]

  • Página 623

    1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury. R CAUTION: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not follo[...]

  • Página 624

    2 Names of Major Opt ions The following software products ar e referred to using a general name: • DeskT opBinder V2 Lite an d D eskTop Binder V2 profes sional → Desk Top- Binder V2 Lite/pr ofessi onal • ScanRouter V2 Lite and ScanRouter V2 professional (optional) → ScanRo uter V2 Lite/professional[...]

  • Página 625

    3 1. Functions Available over a Netwo rk This ma chine pro vides printe r, LAN-F ax, Inter net Fax , an d scann er functio ns over a network. Using the Printer The network interfac e board is compatible wi th NetWare *1 (IPX/SPX, TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.0 (TCP/IP, NetBEUI *2 , IPP *3 ), Wind ows 2000 (TCP/IP, Net- BEUI *2 , IPP *3 ), W indows XP (TCP[...]

  • Página 626

    Functions Available over a Network 4 1 Using Fax Internet Fax This machine converts scann ed document images to e-mail format and transmits the data over the Internet. Specify the e-mail addres s instead of the fa x number, and the n send the docu- ment . E-mail can be received on a fax machine that supp orts Internet Fax, or on a c om- puter that [...]

  • Página 627

    Using Fax 5 1 LAN-Fax You can fax documents over phone lines from any computer connected to the machine via Ethern et, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1 394), or IEEE 8 02.11b (wireless LAN). To send a fax, print from the Windows application you ar e working with, select LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify the destin ation. You can also chec k the sent ima[...]

  • Página 628

    Functions Available over a Network 6 1 Network Scanner E-mail Scan f ile atta ched to an e- mail ca n be sent u sing the e-mail system throug h a LAN or the In ternet. Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to make, see p .13 “ Setting Up the Machine on a Network ” . For deta ils about using this func tion, see “ S ending Scan Files by E[...]

  • Página 629

    Network Scanner 7 1 Network De livery Scanner You can use the machine as a delivery scanner for Sc anRouter V2 Lite / Profes- sional. Scan file or document received by fax can be stored in the delivery server, or de- livered via the network to specified folders on client computers . Reference For details abo ut what settin gs to make, see p .13 “[...]

  • Página 630

    Functions Available over a Network 8 1 Network T WAIN Scan ner You can use the scann ing functio n of this machine from a comp uter connect ed via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394(IP over 1394), or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)). You can sc an documen ts the same way you wou ld if you wer e using a scanner connect ed direct ly to your c omputer. Refere[...]

  • Página 631

    9 2. Connecting the Network Cable to the Network Confirming the Connection 1. 10BASE-T/100BASE -TX port Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable 2. IEEE 1394 ports (optional) Ports for co nnecting the IE EE 1394 int er- face cable 3. Wirel ess LA N card (o ptiona l) Port for us ing th e wir eless LAN AA W007S1 When the IEEE 1394 interfa[...]

  • Página 632

    Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 10 2 Connectin g to the Eth ernet Interf ace The network interface board supp orts 10BASE-T or 1 00BASE-TX connec - tions. A A A A Turn o ff the main pow er switch. Important ❒ Make sure the main po wer is off. See “ Turning On the Pow- er ” , Copy Reference . B B B B Loop the ne twork interface cab[...]

  • Página 633

    Confirming the Connection 11 2 Connecting to the IEEE 13 94 Interf ace Important ❒ Before maki ng the co nnectio n, touch the metallic part to ground your self. Note ❒ Use the inter face cable supplied with the IE EE 1394 i nterface board (optional). ❒ Make sure the interface cable is not looped. A A A A Connect the IEEE 1394 interface cable [...]

  • Página 634

    Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 12 2 Confirming the Connection A A A A Make s ure the LED of the IEEE 802.11b card is l it. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using in inf rastructure mode 1. If it is c onne cte d pro per ly t o th e network, the LED is green when in infrast ructure mode. If the LED is blinking, the machine is searching for dev ices.[...]

  • Página 635

    13 3. Setting Up the Machine on a Network User Tools Menu ( System Settings ) This section des cribes the network settin gs you c an change with User Too ls (Sys- tem Set tings ). Make se ttings accordin g to fu nctions you want to use and the in- terface to be connected. Important ❒ These settin gs should be made by the s ystems administrator, o[...]

  • Página 636

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 14 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional ) is inst alled. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installe d. If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erfac e has priori ty. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] is sele cted for TCP/I[...]

  • Página 637

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 15 3 Internet Fax Interface Se ttings Ethernet Inte rface Settings/ Network See p.26 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *5 $ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.30 “[...]

  • Página 638

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 16 3 IEEE 1394 (IP o ver 1394) Interface Settings/ IEEE 13 94 *1 See p.27 “ Interfa ce Settin gs/IEE E 1394 ” . IP Addr ess $ WINS Configuration ❍ IP ove r 1394 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ Interface Settings/ Network See p.26 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍[...]

  • Página 639

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 17 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional ) is inst alled. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installe d. If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Minimum settings required to use transmission. *[...]

  • Página 640

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 18 3 E-mail Interface Se ttings Ethernet Inte rface Settings/ Network See p.26 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *3 $ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.30 “ Fil[...]

  • Página 641

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 19 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional ) is inst alled. *2 App ears wh en the 802. 11b un it (opt iona l) is inst alled . If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] is sele cted for TCP/IP. *4 [...]

  • Página 642

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 20 3 Network De livery Scanner Interface Se ttings Ethernet Inte rface Settings/ Network See p.26 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address ❍ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *4 $ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Tran[...]

  • Página 643

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 21 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional ) is inst alled. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installe d. If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erfac e has priori ty. *3 When deliv ery opti on is set t o [ On ] , ma[...]

  • Página 644

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 22 3 Network T WAIN Scan ner *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional ) is inst alled. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installe d. If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority. *3 Check [ Ef fective ] i[...]

  • Página 645

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 23 3 Networ k Config uration Any change you make with User Tool s rem ains in ef fect e ven if t he main power sw itch or operation switch is turne d off, or the { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key is pressed. Configuring the network us ing the control panel Note ❒ Operations for System Sett ings are differ ent fr om[...]

  • Página 646

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 24 3 Inte rfac e Settings Network DNS Configu- ration Specify Server 1 ❍ - ❍ Server 2 ❍ - ❍ Server 3 ❍ - ❍ WINS Configu- ration Server ❍ - ❍ Scope ID ❍ - ❍ NW Frame Type Au to S el ect ❍ - ❍ Ethe rnet II ❍ - ❍ Ethern et 802.2 ❍ - ❍ Ethern et 802.3 ❍ - ❍ Ethe rnet SNAP ❍ - ❍[...]

  • Página 647

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 25 3 *1 You can make the TCP/IP settings if SmartDevi ceMonitor for Admin is communi- cati ng wi th t he mac hine usin g IPX /S PX. *2 You can make the IP X/SPX sett ings if Smar tDeviceMo nitor f or Admin is communi- cati ng wi th t he m achin e us ing T CP/ IP. Inte rfac e Settings IEEE 802.1 1b Communication Mod[...]

  • Página 648

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 26 3 Settings You C an Change with User Tool s Interfa ce Settings /Network ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ IP Address Before using this machine in the netw ork en viro nmen t, you must configure the I P address and sub- net ma sk. • Auto-Obtain (DHCP) • Spec if y When you sel ect [ Specify ] , enter [ IP Address: ] and [ Su[...]

  • Página 649

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 27 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Effective Protocol Select the protoco l to use in the network. • TCP/IP:Effective/In valid • NetWare:Effective/Invalid • SMB:Effective/Invalid • AppleTalk:Effective/Invalid Note ❒ Def au lt : TCP /IP: Eff ective , Net- Ware: Effective , SMB: Effect ive, AppleT alk: E ffective ❖ ❖ [...]

  • Página 650

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 28 3 ❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 in- terf ace on a networ k, y ou can- not use the Ethern et interf ace in the same domain. To use b oth interfaces in the same domain, set di fferen t value s for [ Sub-net Mask: ] . ❒ The physical addres s (MAC ad- dress) also app ears. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ WINS Configuration You[...]

  • Página 651

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 29 3 Interfac e Sett ings/IE EE 80 2.11b Preparation You must install the IEEE 802.11b unit (optional) into the machine. Note ❒ Be sure to make all settings simul- taneo usly. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Communication M ode Specifies the communication mode of th e wireless LAN. • 802.11 Ad hoc • Ad hoc • Infrastructure[...]

  • Página 652

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 30 3 Interface Settings/Print I/F Settings List You can check i t ems rel ated to th e network in use. Reference For details about printin g, see p.34 “ Printing the interface settings lists ” . File Transfer ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Delivery Option Ena bles or disa bl es send in g scanned documents via the Scan- Rout[...]

  • Página 653

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 31 3 Note ❒ Def au lt : Of f ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Auto ] : If the authenti- cation method is PLAIN, LOGIN, or, CRAM -MD5. ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ On ] : If the authentica- tion meth od is CRAM -MD5. ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Off ] : I f the authentica- tion method is PLAIN, or LOGIN. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ POP before SMTP Yo[...]

  • Página 654

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 32 3 Note ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Auto ] : Pass word en- cryption is au tomatically set ac- cording to the POP server setting s. ❒ [ Encrypt: ] - [ On ] : Encrypt password. ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Off ] : Do not encrypt password. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator' s E-mail Add. If the sender is not specifie d on e-[...]

  • Página 655

    User Tools Menu (System Settings) 33 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Prog./Change/Del. Subject You can program, change, or de- lete the subject used when sending an Internet fax or scan file as a n at- tachme nt. • Program/Change • Del et e Note ❒ Enter a subjec t using up to 20 al- phanumeric chara cters. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Mail Reception Account Spec if[...]

  • Página 656

    Setting Up the Machine on a Network 34 3 Delet ing a su bject A Select [ Delet e ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select the subject using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Confirmation message appear s. C To delete the [...]

  • Página 657

    35 4. Windows Configuration Configuring TCP/I P This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows for TCP/I P and IPP. Configuring a Wi ndows 95/98/Me Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows 9 5/98/Me compu- ter to use TCP/ IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and th en double-click the Networ k icon. Make sure [ TCP/IP ] is sele[...]

  • Página 658

    Windows Configuration 36 4 Configuring a Windows XP Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figur e a Win dows XP comp uter to use TCP/IP. A A A A On the [ Start ] men u, cl ick [ Control Pane l ] , and then click [ Network and Internet Connections ] . B B B B Click [ Networ k Connecti ons ] , and then double-clic k [ Local Area Con - nectio[...]

  • Página 659

    Configuring TCP/IP 37 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4. 0 Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use TCP/IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and th en double-click the Networ k icon. Make sure [ TCP/IP Protocol ] is se- lected in the [ Netwo rk protocols ] box on the [ Protocols ] ta b. Note ❒ S e le c t[...]

  • Página 660

    Windows Configuration 38 4 Configuring NetBEUI This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows to use Ne tBEUI. Limita tion ❒ NetBEU I cannot be use d under Windows XP. Note ❒ NetBEUI appears as SMB in the control pa nel, manual, and rel ated utilities. Configuring a Wi ndows 95/98/Me Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows[...]

  • Página 661

    Configuring NetBEUI 39 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4. 0 Computer Follow th e procedure belo w to co n- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use NetBE UI. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and th en double-click the Networ k icon. Make su re [ NetBEUI Protocol ] is listed in the [ Network protoco ls ] box on th e [ Protocols ] tab. Note ❒ If NetBE [...]

  • Página 662

    Windows Configuration 40 4[...]

  • Página 663

    41 5. Using the Printer Function This section co ntains instructio ns f or con figurin g the machine as a netwo rk printer. Read th e section that relates to your netw ork enviro nment for informa- tion about correct c onfiguration. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Se rver 2003, or Windows NT 4 .0 Print Server To set up the [...]

  • Página 664

    Using the Printer Function 42 5 • Printi ng wi thou t a pri nt server Note ❒ Under W indow s XP, yo u cann ot print via Ne tBEU I using SM B. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Macintosh To set up the machine as a network prin ter in a Macin tosh environment, see p.49 “ Printin g with a Macint osh ” . TCP/IP SMB IPP TCP/IP SMB IPP LPR TCP/IP S[...]

  • Página 665

    43 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with NetWare To set up the machine as a p rint server or remote printer in a N etWare envi- ronment, see p .51 “ Pri nti ng with NetW are ” . Th e network interface board al- lows you to use the machine as either a print server or a remote printer. • Configuring the machine as a print s erver • Configuring the [...]

  • Página 666

    Using the Printer Function 44 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with UNIX For UNIX printing information, v isit our Web site or con sult your au thorized dealer. UNIX AAW013S1 TCP/IP[...]

  • Página 667

    Printing with Windows 45 5 Printing with Windows Printi ng with a Wind ows 2000/XP , Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This describes how to configure a cli- ent computer on a network using Windows 2000/XP, Window s Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 Server or Win- dows NT 4.0 Wo rkstation as a print server. When using a Windows 2000/XP, [...]

  • Página 668

    Using the Printer Function 46 5 E E E E On the ne twork tree, double-click the nam e o f th e co mpu ter use d as the print server. The printers connected t o the net- work are displayed. F F F F Click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ] . G G G G Click [ OK ] . H H H H Make sure the p ort name is dis- played in the [ Pr [...]

  • Página 669

    Printing with Windows 47 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetBEU I Note ❒ Do not use NetB EUI un - der W indows X P. A Click [ NetBEU I ] , and then click [ Sear ch ] . Available printers are liste d. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ Printers that res pond to a broadcast from the com- puter wi ll be displaye d. To print to a[...]

  • Página 670

    Using the Printer Function 48 5 C In t he [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, ent er the print er name or IP address, and then clic k [ Next ] . D In t he [ Add Standa rd TCP/IP Print- er Port Wizard ] dialog box, cli ck [ Finish ] . LPR Por t A Cli ck [ LPR Port ] , and then click [ New Port ] . B In t he [ Na me or a ddress of serve r provi ding [...]

  • Página 671

    Printing with a Macintosh 49 5 Printing with a Macintosh This des cribes how to con figure a Macinto sh comp uter to us e EtherTalk. Actua l procedure s may vary depending on the version of the Mac O S. The foll owing proce dur es describe h ow to c onfigure Ma c OS 9.1 and Mac OS X v10.1. If you are using othe r versio n than Ma c OS 9.1 an d Mac [...]

  • Página 672

    Using the Printer Function 50 5 Configur ing the Printer Use the control panel to activate the AppleTalk protocol. (The default is active.) Reference For more in format ion about co n- figuration , see p.26 “ I nterface Se t- ting s/Netwo rk ” . Changin g the Printe r Name If th e network h as several sim ilar model printers, the na mes will be[...]

  • Página 673

    Printing with NetWare 51 5 Printing with NetWare This describes how to configure the machine for use a s a print server or remote printer in a NetWare environ- ment . This secti on ass umes Ne tWare is functional and the necessary environ- ment for the NetWare print service is available. Note ❒ NetWare m ust be set t o active us- ing the control [...]

  • Página 674

    Using the Printer Function 52 5 Setting Up as a Print Server NetWar e 3.x A A A A Log on to the file server as a Su- pervisor, or eq uivalent. B B B B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the printer fo[...]

  • Página 675

    Printing with NetWare 53 5 NetWare 4.x, 5/ 5.1, 6 Important ❒ You must set up the p rint se rver using NDS mode in NetWare 4. x, 5/5.1, 6. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ To use NetW are 5/5. 1, 6 • Use the printer as a print se rver. Do not use it as a remo te printer in a PureIP environment. • If you use PureIP, configure the mac hi ne to u se TCP /I P. Fo[...]

  • Página 676

    Using the Printer Function 54 5 J J J J Enter the prin t server name in the [ Prin t Serve r Name: ] box, the printer name in the [ Printer N ame: ] box, the print queue name in the [ Print Queue Name : ] box, an d the prin t queue volume in the [ Queue Vol- ume: ] , an d then cli ck [ Next > ] . • In t he [ Pr int Ser ver Na me: ] box, ent er[...]

  • Página 677

    Printing with NetWare 55 5 B In th e [ Print Server Na me: ] box, enter the print server name. Limitation ❒ Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters . C In t he [ File Server Name: ] b ox, en- ter the name of the fil e server in which the print s erver is to be cre ated. By clicking [ Browse … ] , you can select a file server a mong those liste d[...]

  • Página 678

    Using the Printer Function 56 5 Setting Up as a Re mote Pr inter NetWar e 3.x A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent. B B B B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the pri[...]

  • Página 679

    Printing with NetWare 57 5 B To create a new print server, press the { { { { INSERT } } } } key, and then enter a prin t server name. Note ❒ If you are usin g a currently defined print server, select one of th e print server s shown in th e [ Print Ser ver ] list. Important ❒ Use the same name as that specif ied in NIB Setup T ool. (St ep G - A[...]

  • Página 680

    Using the Printer Function 58 5 NetWare 4.x, 5/ 5.1, 6 A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent. B B B B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. C C C C On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. D D D D In the list, select the printer for which you want[...]

  • Página 681

    Printing with NetWare 59 5 H Cli ck [ OK ] to close the [ NIB Set- up Tool - Network board list ] di alog box. H H H H Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. I I I I On Windo ws, star t NWadmin . Reference For more info rmation abo ut NWadmin, see the operating in- str uct ion s that co me with the NetWa re. J J J J Create a print queue as follows: No[...]

  • Página 682

    Using the Printer Function 60 5 D Select the [ Define additional prop- erties ] check box, an d then c lick [ Create ] . N N N N Assign the printer to the created print server as follows: A Cli ck [ Assignments ] , and th en click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area. B In th e [ Av ailable objects ] box, click the queue create d in step J J J J , a[...]

  • Página 683

    Printing with NetWare 61 5 D D D D On the [ File ] men u, click [ Proper- ties ] . E E E E Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Add Port ] . F F F F Click [ Net work ] , and then click [ Browse ] . G G G G In the tree pane, double-click the name of the file server. The queues are displayed. H H H H Select the queue yo u want to print, and th[...]

  • Página 684

    Using the Printer Function 62 5 - - - - NDPS The machine oper ates using NDPS. Operating requirem ents are as fol- lows: • NetWare Version: 5/5.1, 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer Drivers a nd Operating Systems To use the machine with NDPS, NDPS Gateway is required. • Novell NDPS Gateway For more information about using Novell NDPS Gateway, see the ma[...]

  • Página 685

    63 6. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDeviceMonito r for Client is equipped with the following functio ns. We recommend all users of this printe r to install this software. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol Stack ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? • Peer-to-Peer print f unction • Print directly on the netw ork printe[...]

  • Página 686

    Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 64 6 • Noti ficat ion f unction • An error message ap pears if there is an error on the spec ified printer during transfe r or printing of data. • A window op ens to noti fy you o f print com pletion. You can also s elect to be notified of the print condition, such as disp laying the notice only when Recove[...]

  • Página 687

    SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 65 6 Setting the Net work Monito ring Functio n To view the status of machines using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you must configure SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in advance, so that it monitors the ma- chine whos e status you want to view. A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client . The SmartDeviceMon itor for Cli[...]

  • Página 688

    Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 66 6[...]

  • Página 689

    67 7. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, not only can yo u monitor the status of network pri nters, but you c an also chan ge th e configu ration of the network in- terface board using TCP/IP or IP X/SPX p rotocol. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol Stack *1 IPX is us ed for m onitori ng the ma[...]

  • Página 690

    Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 68 7 • Check the machine's network settin gs and detailed device information. • Change the machine's network se ttings. • Check details of print jobs sent from a computer. • Check job h istories of printed , faxed (LAN-F ax), scanned, an d photocop - ied documents i dentified by user c odes. • [...]

  • Página 691

    SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 69 7 Changing the Network Interf ace Board Confi guration Limita tion ❒ Internet Expl orer 4.01 or a later version is required to use NIB Set- up Tool . A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machi[...]

  • Página 692

    Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 70 7 Locking t he Con trol Pa nel Menu A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion. C [...]

  • Página 693

    SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 71 7 Managing U ser Information A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion. C C C C In the [...]

  • Página 694

    Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 72 7 Managing Address Information A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , and t hen cl ick [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion. C C C C[...]

  • Página 695

    73 8. Configuring the Networ k Interface Board Usi ng a Web Browser You can chec k the s tatus of a m achine and ch ange its settings usin g the Web browser. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? You can remotely check the status of a machine or specify its settings over the network usi ng a comput er's Web br owser. The fol lowi ng func tion s are[...]

  • Página 696

    Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 74 8 Going to the Top Page 1. Header area You can reg ister favorite URLs u sing [ URL ] . To view the Help sect ion, click [ Help ] . 2. Menu area These menus are for configuring the net- work inter face board and check ing ma- chine status. 3. Status Displays ma chine sta tus, ne twork i[...]

  • Página 697

    Types of Menu Configuration and Mode 75 8 Types of Menu Configurat ion and Mode Items that appear on the menu ar ea differ between u ser mode and adminis trator mode . The work area whic h appe ars under the selected menu displays machine status under user m ode and machi ne status and sett ings unde r administrat or mode . Note ❒❍ Indicates ma[...]

  • Página 698

    Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 76 8 *1 You can make the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 1 394, or parallel inte rface sett ings. You can also check the Eth ernet status. Reference For more information about displaying statu s and changing settings, see p.79 “ Using Help o n the Web Brows er ” . Configura- tio n Paper - $ System [...]

  • Página 699

    Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings 77 8 Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, en ter the ma- chine' s IP addre ss (f or example http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, w here the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ). The sta tus of t h e machin e you chose appears on [...]

  • Página 700

    Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 78 8 Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, en ter the ma- chine' s IP addre ss (f or example http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, w here the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ). The sta tus of t h e machin e you ch[...]

  • Página 701

    Using Help on the Web Browser 79 8 Using Help on the Web B r o w s e r When using H elp for the first time, clic king ei ther [ Help ] in the header area or the icon marked “ ? ” in the work a rea makes the following screen appear. From ther e you can ch eck Help in two different ways, as shown below: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Checki ng a Help Us ing the[...]

  • Página 702

    Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 80 8[...]

  • Página 703

    81 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view p rinter status a nd con- figure the network interface board us- ing telnet. Note ❒ You shou ld spe cify a p ass wor d s o only the network adm inistrator, or a person wi th network ad ministra- tor pri vilege s, can us e remot e mainte nance. ❒ The passwo rd is th e same as that used for[...]

  • Página 704

    Appendix 82 9 Commands List Use t he “ help ” command to displa y remote maintena nce use. Note ❒ Enter “ help ” to display a list of commands that can be used. msh> h elp ❒ Enter “ help command_na me ” to display information about the syn- tax of that command. msh> h elp command_n ame TCP/IP address Use the “ if conf ig ”[...]

  • Página 705

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 83 9 - - - - Address ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Subnet Mask A number us ed to numerical ly “ mask ” or hide the IP a ddress on the network by eliminat ing those parts of the address that are alike for all machines on the network. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Broadcas t address A specified address for sending data to s pecific device s on t[...]

  • Página 706

    Appendix 84 9 DHCP Use the “ dhcp ” command to con fig- ure the DHCP settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reference The fo llo wing c omman d di splay s the current DHCP setting s. msh> d hcp ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configuration You can config ure the DH CP set- ting s. msh> dhcp inte rface_n ame [on|o ff] Note ❒ Sel ect [ on ] to enable DHCP. Se- lect [[...]

  • Página 707

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 85 9 Printer st atus The foll owing co mmand can be used to get information about the current printer st atus: msh> comm and Note ❒ For more information about print jobs is displa yed when th e ID numbe r is adde d after the prn log command . Reference For more informat ion about the meaning of the data returne d u[...]

  • Página 708

    Appendix 86 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display Shows SNMP informat ion and available protocols. msh> snm p ? The followin g command displays the settings of registered number specifi ed. msh> snmp [ registered_number ] Omit ting the num ber di spla ys al l access set tings. msh> snm p [-p] Note ❒ Add “ -p ” (as above) to have the in form at i[...]

  • Página 709

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 87 9 The following is a sample configu- ration using the registra tion number 3 with the IP address 192.168.15.16: msh> s nmp 3 ip 192.1 68.15. 16 The following is a sample configu- ration using the registra tion number 3 with the I PX address 7390A448, and th e MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65: msh> snm p 3 ipx 7390[...]

  • Página 710

    Appendix 88 9 Example o utput: port 9 100 timeo ut=30 0(se c) bidire ct of f • “ Port ” specifies the port n umber of the direct printi ng port. • The “ bidirect ” setting in dicates whether the direct pr inting port is bidirectional or not. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Setting timeou t You can specify the timeout inter- val in use when receiving da[...]

  • Página 711

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 89 9 SMB Use the “ smb ” comm and to co nfigu re or delete the NetBEU I settings such as the computer name or workgroup name. msh> sm b para met er Note ❒ You canno t use a comp uter name starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” . ROUTE Use the “ ro ute ” co mma nd t o co nt rol the routing table. This com[...]

  • Página 712

    Appendix 90 9 SPRINT Use the “ sprint ” comma nd to view and configu re SCSI print (SBP-2) on IEEE 1394. Limita tion ❒ You ca n use this fu nction w hen the optional IEEE 1394 board is in- stalled. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Viewing settings The fo llo wing c omman d di splay s the current IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) setting s: msh> spr int ❖ ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 713

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 91 9 Note ❒ Wh en c han gi ng the in ter fa ce t o IEEE 802.11b, see p.82 “ TCP/IP address ” . ❒ When configuri ng the IEEE 80 2.11b TCP/I P, s ee p.82 “ TCP/IP ad- dress ” . Changing the host name Use the “ hostname ” comman d to change the printer nam e. msh> h ostna me interf ace _name printe r_nam[...]

  • Página 714

    Appendix 92 9 Note ❒ Enter the printer name using up to 15 characte rs. ❒ You cannot u se a printer nam e starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” . ❒ The Ethernet interface and I EEE 802.11b int erface will have the same printer name. WINS Use the “ wins ” command t o config- ure WINS server set tings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Viewing setting Th[...]

  • Página 715

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 93 9 AutoNet Use the “ autonet ” comma nd t o con- figure AutoNe t settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display The fo llo wing c omman d di splay s the current AutoN et settings. msh> aut onet ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configuration You ca n confi gur e the Aut oNet setting s. msh> auto net in terfa ce_nam e [on|of f] Note ❒ Se[...]

  • Página 716

    Appendix 94 9 DNS Use the “ dns ” command to c onfig ure or display DNS (Domain Name Sys- tem) settings . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ View sett ing The fo llo wing c omman d di splay s current DNS sett ings : msh> d ns ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Using the D NS serve r obtained from the DHC P serv er The foll owing c ommand ena - bles/disables use the DNS server ob[...]

  • Página 717

    Remote Maintenance by telnet 95 9 - - - - Setting Protocols The protoc ols described in this se c- tion provide various funct ions that can b e u sed on t he m ach in e. Important ❒ If a protocol is disabled or inactive, functions provided by that proto- col cannot be used. Reference For more informati on about set- ting protocols, consult your n[...]

  • Página 718

    Appendix 96 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ RSH/RCP • Printer func tion us ing the com- mand line • Scanner function using the Net- work TWAIN Driver • Function to obtain d evice infor- mation us ing the c ommand l ine ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ DIPRINT • Printer func tion usin g SmartDe- viceMonitor for Client ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ WEB • Web browser function ❖ ❖ ?[...]

  • Página 719

    Using DHCP 97 9 Using DHCP You can use the printer in a DHCP en- vironment. You can also register the printer N etBIOS name on a WINS server when it is ru nning. If you connect an Ethernet interface and IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface simultaneo usly, pay attention to the following: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a st atic IP a ddres s is se t for both in[...]

  • Página 720

    Appendix 98 9 Note ❒ If a static address is not selected, or i s set to 0.0.0. 0, the int erfac e using the addres s assigned by DHC P is used . Note ❒ Printers that register the p rinter NetBIO S name on a WINS serv er mus t be co nfigur ed fo r the WIN S server. See p.92 “ WINS ” . ❒ Support ed DHCP ser vers: Mi cro- soft DHCP serve r -[...]

  • Página 721

    SNMP 99 9 SNMP The machine is equ ipped with an SNMP (Simple Network Management Proto- col) agent that operates under UDP and IPX on the Ethernet/wireles s LAN in- terface, and UDP on the IE EE 1394 (IP over 1394) interf ace. Usin g the SNMP manager yo u can get inform ation about the m achine. The def ault community names are “ public ” and ?[...]

  • Página 722

    Appendix 100 9 Error Messages on the Display This sec tion describes the most common net work-relate d messages t hat appear on the display. If a message not described here appe ars, act according to that mess age . Messages witho ut Code Numbers Reference Before turning the main power off, see “ Tur ning On the Power ” , Cop y Re fer- ence . M[...]

  • Página 723

    Error Messages on the Display 101 9 Messages with Cod e Numbers Note ❒ A message reporting an error appea rs on the display as shown. Message Causes Solutions Code numbers Cannot connect with DHCP server The DHCP server cannot be found. Check the DHCP s erver is running on the network. 101 201 301 The sam e IP Ad - dress al- ready exis t s The sp[...]

  • Página 724

    Appendix 102 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Code Numbers The problem interface is displayed. • 1XX: Ethernet • 2XX: IEEE 802.11b • 3XX: IEEE 1394 • 0XX: Independent of inte rface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Order of priority of me ssages (when multiple errors occ ur) Order of interface priori ty • 1.Ethernet • 2.IEEE 802.11b • 3.IEEE 1394 Order of prot ocol p[...]

  • Página 725

    Understanding Displayed Information 103 9 Understanding Displayed Information This section descri bes how to read the status informati on returned by the net- work interface board. Print J ob In format ion Print job status can be viewed using the following c ommands: • telnet : Use the “ status ” command. Se e p.85 “ Printer stat us ” . P[...]

  • Página 726

    Appendix 104 9 Machine St atus and Configur ation You can ch eck the mach ine status an d configurat ion using t elnet or UNIX. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ telnet Use the “ info ” or “ status ” command . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ UNIX Use t he “ lpr ” or “ lpsta t ” comm and, or “ stat ” , “ info ” param eter of rsh, rcp, o r ftp. Machi ne sta tu[...]

  • Página 727

    Understanding Displayed Information 105 9 Malfunction: Tray 2 There is a problem with tray 2. Malfunction: Tray 3 There is a problem with tray 3. Malfunction: Tray 4 There is a problem with tray 4. Misma tch: Paper Size Indicated paper t ray does not co ntain p aper of selec ted s ize. Misma tch: Paper Size and Type In dicated paper t ray does not [...]

  • Página 728

    Appendix 106 9 Machin e configuration Note ❒ “ * ” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting. ❒ Regarding *1-*5, see table below. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *1 Input Tray : Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *2 Input Tray : Paper Size Item Descr iption Input Tray No. ID number of the paper tr ay Name Name of the paper tray *1 Paper Size P aper size loa ded i[...]

  • Página 729

    Understanding Displayed Information 107 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *3 Input Tray : Status ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *4 Output Tray: Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *5 Output Tray: Status 8 1 / 2 × 11 LT L 11 × 8 1 / 2 LT K 5 1 / 2 × 8 1 / 2 HLT L 8 1 / 2 × 5 1 / 2 HLT K Custom Size Custom Size 10 1 / 2 × 7 1 / 4 Executive K 7 1 / 4 × 10 1 / 2 Executive L 8 1 / 4 × 13 Fol[...]

  • Página 730

    Appendix 108 9 Configur ing the Network I nterface Board The network interface board settings can be displayed using the commands be- low. • telnet : Use the “ show ” command. See p.85 “ Network interface board config- uration settings information ” . Item na me Meaning Common Mode Protocol Up/Down “ Up ” me an s ac tive ; “ Down ?[...]

  • Página 731

    Understanding Displayed Information 109 9 TCP/IP Mode “ Up ” m ean s ac tiv e, “ Down ” means inactive. ftp lpr rsh teln et diprint web http ftpc snmp ipp auton et EncapType Frame typ e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Ad dres s IP a ddre ss Netmask Subnet ma sk Broadcast Broadcast addres s Gateway Default gateway ad dress AccessRan[...]

  • Página 732

    Appendix 110 9 NetW are EncapType Frame typ e RPRINTER num ber Remote printer number Print serve r name Print se rver name File server name Name of the connect file s erver Context name Context of print ser ver Switch Mode Active mode NDS/Bindery (this value is fixed) Packet negotiation (this value is fixed) Login Mode Print job timeout Time of the[...]

  • Página 733

    Understanding Displayed Information 111 9 IEEE 802. 11b *3 Device name DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Ad dres s IP a ddre ss Netmask Subnet ma sk Broadcast Broadcast addres s SSID SSI D bei ng us ed Channel range Channels available for use Channel Channel being us ed Communication mode IEEE 802.11b interface transmission m ode Authenticat[...]

  • Página 734

    Appendix 112 9 *1 You can displa y these item names when i nstalling t he optional 1394 inter face boar d. *2 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 5. *3 You can display the se item names when install ing the optional 802.11b inter face unit. *4 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 3. WINS ether Ethernet interface WINS name Prima[...]

  • Página 735

    Message List 113 9 Message List This is a list of me ssages written to the machine's sy stem log. The sys tem log can be viewed using the “ syslog ” command . System Log Info rmation You can use the following methods to view the system log: • telnet : Use the “ syslog ” command. See p.85 “ System log information ” . Mess age Caus[...]

  • Página 736

    Appendix 114 9 Cannot find rprinter (<print server name>/ <printer number>) Check the printer number regis tered in the print s erver. Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP address change s when DHCP LEASE is renewed. To a lways assign t he same I P ad- dress, se t a st atic I P addre ss to the DH CP serv - er. child process exec e[...]

  • Página 737

    Message List 115 9 Frametype =<frame type name> The <frame type name> is configured to be used on NetWare. httpd s tart. httpd ha s started. IEEE 802.11 b <Transmi ssion mo de> mode Trans missi on mode for IE EE 80 2.11b (Example: current mode is infrastructur e mod e.) IEEE 80 2.11b [infras tructu re] mode (Exam ple: curr ent mo [...]

  • Página 738

    Appendix 116 9 IEEE 80 2.11b T X Rate <Transf er Speed> The I EEE 80 2.11b tran smitting s peed (s et speed ) is disp laye d. (Example: cu rrent Tx Rate is 11 Mbps.) IEEE 802.11b Tx Rat e 11 Mb ps Transmi ssio n speed s vary de pendi ng on sig - nal quality. Displayed values may differ from actual tran smis sion spe ed. inetd start. An inetd [...]

  • Página 739

    Message List 117 9 NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer name> The NetBEUI Computer Na me is defined as <computer name>. nmsd sta rt. (Net BEUI ) nmsd (Na me S erv er D aemo n) has s tart ed. nprinter start. (NetWare) (In remote printer mode) N etWare servi ce has start ed. nwstar t s tart. (NetWa re) The servi ce for Ne tWa re pro tocol st [...]

  • Página 740

    Appendix 118 9 session<community name> not defined. The requested community name is not de- fined. session_ipx<community name> not defined. The requested community name is not de- fined. Set context to <N DS context name> A <NDS context name> ha s been set. shutdown signal receive d. network s ervic e re- booting... Rebootin[...]

  • Página 741

    Message List 119 9 SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close. No response from the SMTP protocol. Cannot connect to the SMTP server. This could be be- cause: • Another server other tha n the SMTP server has been sp ecified. • The SMTP server port numb er is incorrect. SMTPC: failed to c onnect s mtp server. Failed to co nnect the SMTP server. Thi[...]

  • Página 742

    Appendix 120 9 When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame Operating Environmen t The follo wing combina tions of oper- ating system and MetaFrame are sup - ported: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Te rminal Server Edition • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3 • MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windo ws 2000 Se rver /A dvanced Server ?[...]

  • Página 743

    When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame 121 9 • When print ing a large number of bitmap images or us ing the serv er in a WAN envi ronmen t over dial-up lines su ch as ISDN, depending on th e data rat e, printing may be disabled or er- ro rs m ay occ ur. • When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or lat er vers ion s, we rec om - mend configuring [ Cl[...]

  • Página 744

    Appendix 122 9 Precautions Please pay attention to the follo wing when usin g the networ k inte rface board. When configuration is n eces- sary, fol low the ap propri ate proce- dures b elow . Connectin g a Di al-Up Ro uter to a Network When using NetWare (file server) If the NetWare file server and pr inter are on opposit e sides of a router, pack[...]

  • Página 745

    Precautions 123 9 When Using Netw ork Utility If the machine is connected to a net- work, ob serve the follo wing poin ts when setting up the machine or changing settings : For more details, see th e operating in- structions and Help for ScanRouter V2 L ite/ Prof ess iona l and De skTo p- Binder V2 Li te/P rofes sio nal. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d ia[...]

  • Página 746

    Appendix 124 9 NetWare Prin ting Form feed You should not configure form feed on NetW are. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer might no t work prop erly. If y o u w a n t t o c h a n g e f o r m f e e d s e t - tings, always configure them using Windows. • Under Windows 95/98/M[...]

  • Página 747

    Precautions 125 9 • If a print job sent from SmartDe- viceMonitor for Client i s interrupt- ed and the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, send the print job again. • Print jobs sent from another com- puter do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of pro- toc ol. • If various us ers send pri nt jobs u s- i[...]

  • Página 748

    Appendix 126 9 Specifications *1 The 1394 int erface board suppor ts only TCP/IP . *2 Use the SmartDeviceMo nitor for Client p ort. *3 To use IPP u nder Windows X P or Windows S erver 2003 , use the Standar d IPP por t. Note , in S mar tDevi ceMo nit or for C lien t howeve r, th is po rt doe s no t supp ort di gest access authen tication. *4 This c[...]

  • Página 749

    127 INDEX A Access Control , 83 access type , 86 AutoNet , 93 , 98 B Bidirectional SCSI print , 28 Broadcast addre ss , 83 C Cha nne l , 29 Commun ication M ode , 29 Commun ication S peed , 29 commun ity name , 86 config uration access type , 86 community name , 86 Network Inte rface Board confi gurati on , 108 Web Bro wser , 73 D Delivery Optio n [...]

  • Página 750

    128 GB GB EN USA B622 -8535 R remot e ma intena nce telne t , 81 Return to Defaults , 29 ROUTE , 89 S SCSI print (SBP-2) , 28 SLP , 89 SmartDeviceM onitor for Client , 124 SMB , 89 SMTP Server , 30 SNMP , 85 , 99 specification s , 126 SPRINT , 90 SSID Setti ng , 29 subne t mask , 83 syste m Log , 113 syste m log information , 85 T Teln et , 104 tel[...]

  • Página 751

    Copyri ght © 2003[...]

  • Página 752

    Network Guide GB GB EN USA B622-8535[...]

  • Página 753

    PostScript3 Unit Type 2018 Operating I nstructions Supplement[...]

  • Página 754

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. Important Conte[...]

  • Página 755

    i TABLE OF CONTENTS How to Read Thi s Manual ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ...... 1 1. PostSc ript 3 Ins talla ble O pti ons ...... ..... .... ..... .... ....... .... ..... .... ....... .... .... ..... .... ....... .... ..... .... ..... .... 3 Setting Up Optio ns ........ ...... ...... .....[...]

  • Página 756

    ii[...]

  • Página 757

    1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury. R CAUTION: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not follo[...]

  • Página 758

    2[...]

  • Página 759

    3 1. PostScript 3 Installable Options The following options ar e available: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Input Paper Device •L o w e r P a p e r T r a y s ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Output P aper D evice •I n t e r n a l T r a y 2 Setting Up Option s To use installed option s correctly, first set up the printer driver. If the options are not recognized, you cannot use[...]

  • Página 760

    PostS crip t 3 4 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mac O S You can set up all options using the [ Chooser ] di alog box. Limitatio n ❒ Under Mac OS X , this function is no t available.[...]

  • Página 761

    Printing a Document 5 1 Printing a Document This section descr ibes how to print documents from an application. Note ❒ The Mac OS X referred to in this section is Mac OS 10.1. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Source The following ta ble shows where you can select this f unction. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destina tion Tray The following ta ble shows where you can sele[...]

  • Página 762

    PostS crip t 3 6 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Duplex Printing Use this function to s elect duplex printing. Limitatio n ❒ This function is available on Type 3 machines only. Che ck your machine type . The following ta ble shows where you can select this f unction. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Collate Use this function to enable collation. With it, the printer can effici[...]

  • Página 763

    Printing a Document 7 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Edge Smoothing Use this function to improve the pr int quality of text. Indentations in curved lines are automaticall y smoothed producing a cleaner ap pearance. Limitatio n ❒ When [ Edge Smoothing ] is selected, [ Toner Saving ] is disabled. ❒ This function is for improving the qual ity of printed text, [...]

  • Página 764

    PostS crip t 3 8 1 Toner Savi ng, Edge Smoothi ng Follow the pr ocedure below to print docum ents usin g Toner Saving or Ed ge Smooth ing. Windows 95 /98/Me A A A A From an application, click [ Print ] on the [ File ] menu. The [ Pr int ] dialog box app ears. B B B B Select the printer, and then click [ Properties ] . C C C C Click the [ Print Qual[...]

  • Página 765

    Printing a Document 9 1 D D D D Click [ Print Mode ] to select the function you want to use. E E E E Click [ OK ] to close the [ Advanc ed Options ] dialog box. F F F F After making the necessary settings, click [ OK ] to close the [ Pri nting Pr eferenc- es ] dialo g box. G G G G Start the printing from the application's [ Print ] dialog box.[...]

  • Página 766

    PostS crip t 3 10 1 Printer Utility for Mac By using Prin ter Util ity for Mac, you can download fon ts, cha nge the printe r name, and so on. Limita tion ❒ If the Macint osh and prin ter are connec ted by USB, you can not use P rinter Utility for Mac. Note ❒ Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Printer Drivers and Util[...]

  • Página 767

    Printer Utility for Mac 11 1 Starti ng Printe r Utilit y for Mac This descri bes how to start Printer Utility for Mac. Mac OS Important ❒ Before starting Printer Utility for M ac, make sure the printer is selected in [ Chooser ] on the Apple menu. A A A A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon . The [ Printer Utility for Mac ] dial og box [...]

  • Página 768

    PostS crip t 3 12 1 Printe r Utility fo r Mac Func tions Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Apple menu (Mac O S), Printer Ut ility for Mac m enu (Mac OS X) • [ About Printer Utility for Mac... ] • [ Choose Printer... ] (Mac OS X) Displays the [ C hoose target printer ] dialog box. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ [ File ] men[...]

  • Página 769

    Printer Utility for Mac 13 1 Downloadin g PS Fo nts You can do wnload t he PS fonts to the mac hine memory. Important ❒ The following downl oad procedure as sumes you are a s ystem administrator. If you a re not, consult y our system adm inistrat or. ❒ Resetting the mac hine deletes the fonts. ❒ Make sure the machine and Macintosh are connect[...]

  • Página 770

    PostS crip t 3 14 1 Deleting Fonts You can de lete font s from machine memory. A A A A On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Display Printer's Fonts... ] . The dialog box appea rs. B B B B Select the fonts you want to d elete. Limitatio n ❒ You cannot delete fonts that appear in italics. C C C C Click [ Delete ] . A confirmation message appears. D [...]

  • Página 771

    Printer Utility for Mac 15 1 Printin g Font Samples You can pr int samples o f fonts that ha ve been downlo aded into t he memory. Limita tion ❒ Under Mac OS X, this function is not available. Note ❒ The paper sel ected under [ Page Set up ] is used. A A A A On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Print Fonts Sample... ] . B B B B Click [ Print ] . Rena[...]

  • Página 772

    PostS crip t 3 16 1 Mac OS X A On the [ Pri nter Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer... ] . B In th e [ A vailable Network Zones: ] list, clic k the zone for the Macintosh in use. C In the [ Available Printers: ] list, sel ect the printer whose name you changed in step B B B B , and then click [ Choose ] . Restarti ng the Machine You can[...]

  • Página 773

    Printer Utility for Mac 17 1 Selectin g the Zone You can ch ange the zone the machin e belongs to und er Appletalk . Important ❒ Make sure the machine and Macintosh are connected in the Appletalk envi- ronment. A A A A On the [ U tility ] menu, click [ Select Zone... ] . The zone the p rinter belongs to and the available zone list appear. B B B B[...]

  • Página 774

    PostS crip t 3 18 1 Launching t he Dialog Consol e You can create and edit PostScr ipt files for printing and downloading to the ma- chine. Important ❒ Because the “ Launc h Dialogu e Cons ole ” is recommended for users wh o have a firm grasp of PostScript, you a re advised to take extreme c are when us ing it. ❒ Only download PostScript fi[...]

  • Página 775

    19 INDEX C Collate , 6 D Deleting Fo nts , 14 Dest inati on Tra y , 5 Disp laying Fonts , 13 Display ing the M achine Status , 17 Download ing Pos tScript Files , 16 Down loadi ng PS Fonts , 13 Dupl ex Pr inti ng , 6 E Edge Smooth ing , 7 I Install ing Print er Utility for Mac , 10 L Launchin g the Dialog Console , 18 P Page Setup , 14 Paper Source[...]

  • Página 776

    20 GB GB EN USA B622-8569[...]

  • Página 777

    Copyri ght © 2003[...]

  • Página 778

    Post Script3 Un it Type 20 18 Ope rating In stru ctions Sup plem ent GB GB EN USA B622-8569[...]

  • Página 779

    UNIX Supplement[...]

  • Página 780

    Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed inst ructions o n the oper ation and no tes about the use of thi s machin e. To get m aximum versat ility from thi s mach ine a ll opera tors are reques ted to re ad th is manu al caref ully and follo w the in structi ons. Plea se ke ep this m anual in a hand y place n ear the mach ine. Important Conte[...]

  • Página 781

    i TABLE OF CONTENTS How to Read Thi s Manual ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ...... 1 1. U NIX Configur ation Bef ore S etup ... ..... .... .... ....... .... ..... .... ....... .... ..... .... ..... ...... ..... .... .... ..... ...... ..... .... ..... .. 3 Usin g the “ lp ” / “ lpr ” c[...]

  • Página 782

    ii[...]

  • Página 783

    1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury. R CAUTION: This sym bol indicat es a pote ntially haz ardou s situat ion which, if instruction s are not follo[...]

  • Página 784

    2[...]

  • Página 785

    3 1. UNIX Configuration This section explains how to set up a network printer and check print status us- ing UNIX. Limita tion ❒ To print from a UN IX workstation , use a file that the printer supp orts. Before Setup Setup v aries depend ing on the printi ng commands . Be sure to mak e setti ngs ac- cordingly. Using the “l p”/“lpr” comman[...]

  • Página 786

    UNIX Configuration 4 1 Using the Installation Shell Script The installation shell script helps the setup process. The installation shell script automates s ome of the tasks in configuring /etc /hosts, /etc/prin tcap; creating the spool d irectory f or BSD UNIX; and runnin g the “ lpadm in ” com mand for System V UNIX. Preparation The install at[...]

  • Página 787

    Using the Installation Shell Script 5 1 A A A A Enter the following: # ping 19 2.16 8.15 .16 If the address is configur ed correctly, the following message appears: 192.1 68.15 .16 is alive If the address is configur ed incorrectly, the following message appears : no answe r from 192.16 8.15 .16 Note ❒ When you use NIS, the IP address and host na[...]

  • Página 788

    UNIX Configuration 6 1 C When a user name is requeste d, leave the user name field blank and press the { { { { RETURN } } } } ( { { { { ENTER } } } } ) key. 331 Pass wor d requ ired fo r root . Passwo rd: D When a password is requested, leave the password field blank and press the { { { { RETUR N } } } } ( { { { { ENTER } } } } ) key. 230 Use r roo[...]

  • Página 789

    Using the Installation Shell Script 7 1 Note ❒ The IP address will be added to the /etc/hosts file . ❒ If the host name of the printer has already been configured, press the { { { { RE- TURN } } } } ( { { { { ENTER } } } } ) key. Nothing w ill be added to the /etc/h osts file. F F F F Enter the printer's host name. Enter Printe r host na m[...]

  • Página 790

    UNIX Configuration 8 1 I I I I Do a test print to make sure that the settings are correct. # lpr -Pn p file _na me # lp -dnp file_n ame Reference For more information about the “ lpr ” and “ lp ” comm ands, see p.14 “ Print - ing Methods ” . Deleti ng the printer To print using the “ lp ” or “ lpr ” comman ds, the option specifi[...]

  • Página 791

    Using the Installation Shell Script 9 1 After Execut ing the Ins tallat ion Shell Scri pt The printing environment is au tomatically set up when the in stallation shell script is executed . This section des cribes setup conte nts when the installation shell sc ript is execut- ed under Red Hat Li nux, S olaris, an d HP-UX . Linux ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Add[...]

  • Página 792

    UNIX Configuration 10 1 ❒ Each entry is separated in to several fields by colons . Each entry begins with a colon, f ollowed by the entry, and then ends with a colon, a back slash, and fina lly a return. ❒ The first l ine of the fiel d is the name of the printer. Use thi s name when log- ging on to a netwo rk printer from a w orkstation. You c [...]

  • Página 793

    Using the Installation Shell Script 11 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Making the log file Error messages are logged to a file created in the /var/log directory. T he log file name is the printer name followed by “ d-errs ” . Note ❒ The log file i s used for logging errors or warnin g messages by the UNIX works tation . ❒ The log file should be made for [...]

  • Página 794

    UNIX Configuration 12 1 B Register the printer as a remote printer. # lpadmi n -p np -s np host ! option -T du mp -I any •“ np ” is the printer name. “ np hos t ” is the host na me. For more in forma- tion about “ option ” , see p.19 “ Specifying the Device Option ” . “ lp ” will be assigned if the option is not used. When pri[...]

  • Página 795

    Using the Installation Shell Script 13 1 C Set the print er so the print jo b is put in the print qu eue. /usr/l ib/a cce pt np D Set the print er to perform the print job. /usr/l ib/e nab le np E Restart the sch eduler. /usr/l ib/l psc hed[...]

  • Página 796

    UNIX Configuration 14 1 Printing Methods Printi ng with “ lpr ” and “ lp ” Execute one of the following c ommands according to type of workstation used: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ BSD UNIX workstation, Linux % lpr -P printe r_nam e file _name [fi le_na me.. .] For e xam ple: (printer name: “ np ” ; file names: “ file1 ” and “ fi le2 ” ) % [...]

  • Página 797

    Printing Methods 15 1 rsh % rsh host_name print < file_nam e For example: (host name: “ npho st ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ) % rsh nphost prin t < file 1 Note ❒ “ host_name ” is the name entered wh en executing the ins tallation shell sc ript. ❒ If you a re using HP-U X, use the “ remsh ” command ins tead of “ rsh ” . rc[...]

  • Página 798

    UNIX Configuration 16 1 Note ❒ You can use w ild cards ( “ * ” or “ ? ” ) for the file name with th e “ mput ” co m- mand. The following procedure shows an example of how to print a file using the “ ftp ” command . A A A A Start ftp using the IP address or host name of the printer. % ftp IP_addre ss B B B B Enter the user name. Le[...]

  • Página 799

    Printer Status 17 1 Printer Status You can us e the foll owing co mmands to ha ve informat ion and pr inter sta tus dis- played or copied to a fil e. Use the “ lpq ” or “ lpstat ” command to display print er status, or informat ion about print jobs. Use the “ rsh ” , “ rcp ” , or “ ftp ” commands to get more detailed information[...]

  • Página 800

    UNIX Configuration 18 1 Note ❒ Leave the user name and password field blank and press the { { { { RETURN } } } } ( { { { { EN- TER } } } } ) key. ❒ “ - ” indicates standard output. It will be displayed on screen if standard out- put has n ot been specified. Parameters that can b e used with “ rsh ” , “ rcp ” , and “ ftp ” are as[...]

  • Página 801

    Specifying the Device Option 19 1 Specifying the Device Option With the follo wing options, you can print wi th specific pr inter functions. Configur ing the Device Opt ion The configuration of the print option varies, depending on printing commands. • rsh % rsh host_nam e print o ptio n1=va lue1 ,… < file _name • rcp % rcp file_nam e host[...]

  • Página 802

    UNIX Configuration 20 1 Limita tion ❒ The optional charac ter strings the pri nter can re cognize contain a maximum of 256 bytes. ❒ The number of available characters u sed as options is limited, depen ding on oper atin g system s. - - - - Using the “cd” command with ftp For printing with ftp, if the option is s pecified using the “ cd ?[...]

  • Página 803

    Specifying the Device Option 21 1 Printer Language Specify a printer language to print in. filety pe= p rint er lang uage fil= printer langu age The following sample shows how to print with PostScript 3 (host name: “ nphost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh % rsh npho st p rint file type=po stsc ript < fi le1 • rcp % rcp file 1 np ho[...]

  • Página 804

    UNIX Configuration 22 1 Input T ray Specify a default in put tray. Limita tion ❒ Only installed input trays are available. ❒ Before printing a Po stScript 3 or PC L 5e file, the input tray option must be set to on . tray= valu e of in put tray The followin g sample sho ws how to print fro m tray 2 (host na me: “ npho st ” ; file name: “ f[...]

  • Página 805

    Specifying the Device Option 23 1 The following sample shows how to print using A4 paper (host name: “ nph ost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh % rsh npho st p rint pape r=a4 < file 1 • rcp % rcp file 1 np host: pape r=a4 • ftp ftp> pu t file 1 pap er=a4 11 × 17 ledger 8 1 / 2 × 11 lett er 5 1 / 2 × 8 1 / 2 halfletter 8 1 / [...]

  • Página 806

    UNIX Configuration 24 1 Paper Type Specify the paper type. Limita tion ❒ This function is available only for PostScript 3 or PCL 5e. ❒ Only the loaded paper type s are available. mediat ype= va lue of pa per typ e The following sample shows how to print using recycled paper (host name: “ nphost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh % rsh [...]

  • Página 807

    Specifying the Device Option 25 1 Output T ray Specify the output tray. outbin = value of output tray Limita tion ❒ Only installed output trays are available. T h e f o l l o w i n g s a m p l e s h o w s h o w t o p r i n t f r o m i n t e r n a l t r a y 1 ( h o s t n a m e : “ nphost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh % rsh npho st p [...]

  • Página 808

    UNIX Configuration 26 1 Collat ing Specify the number of collated s ets. qty= number of colla ted se ts (1 to 999 ) Limita tion ❒ This function is available only for PostScript 3 or PCL 5e. ❒ Do not specify “ qty ” and “ copies ” commands at the same time. The following sample shows how to print 10 copies using the collate functio n (ho[...]

  • Página 809

    Specifying the Device Option 27 1 • ftp ftp> put f ile1 dupl ex=o n,bindi ng=l onged ge Binding Specify the binding si de for duplex printing . Limita tion ❒ This function is available on Type 3 machines only. Check your machi ne type. Note ❒ Before specifying th e binding option, the du plex option must be set to on. ❒ Data and paper vo[...]

  • Página 810

    UNIX Configuration 28 1 • rcp % rcp file 1 np host: orie ntation =por trait • ftp ftp> put f ile1 orie ntat ion=por trai t Resoluti on Specify the printing res olution. resolu tion = val ue of res oluti on The following sample shows how to print with 600 dpi and better quality. (host name: “ nphost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh[...]

  • Página 811

    Specifying the Device Option 29 1 The f ollow ing samp le sho ws how to pr int us ing the ISO 4 cha racter set (h ost name: “ nphost ” ; file name: “ file1 ” ): • rsh % rsh npho st p rint syms et=iso4 < f ile1 • rcp % rcp file 1 np host: syms et=iso4 • ftp ftp> put f ile1 syms et=i so4 ISO 69 iso6 9 ISO L1 isol1 ISO L2 isol2 ISO[...]

  • Página 812

    30 GB G B EN USA B622 INDEX B Binding Option , 27 BSD UNIX workstation Deletin g the pri nter , 8 Printer Status , 17 Printing Method , 14 C Collatin g Option , 26 config uration UNIX , 3 Cop ie s Option , 25 D Deleting th e printer , 8 Devic e Op tion , 19 Dupl ex Pr inti ng Option , 26 F ftp Printing , 15 H HP-U X Deletin g the pri nter , 8 Print[...]

  • Página 813

    Copyri ght © 2003[...]

  • Página 814

    UNIX Supplement GB GB EN USA[...]